Vezérlőmüködtetése ANGOL

USER INTERFACE
OPERATION
DECO 2000
300493 en
Δ ATTENTION !
TORNOS SA
Before handling / operating the machine, CH-2740 MOUTIER
read first the SAFETY REGULATIONS ! Printed in Switzerland Copyright E1999-2008 http://www.tornos.ch
USER INTERFACE OPERATION - DECO 2000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERALITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1 Conformity to standards and directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 DIFFERENTIATION OF DEGREES OF RISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 IMPORTANT SAFETY INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. PRECAUTIONARY NOTES BEFORE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.1 SAFETY WITH DOORS OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 APPLICATION OF FANUC VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 REFERENCE ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
300493 en - 01/08 3
3. USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3.1 LOCATION OF INTERFACES ON MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3.1.1 DECO 7a/10a & 7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3.1.2 DECO 13a 226-0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.1.3 DECO 13bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.1.4 DECO 20a & 26a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.2 NC KEYBOARD (PROGRAMMING)FANUC 16I TA & TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3 CONTROL PANEL (PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTORS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.3.1 Control panel 7a/10a &7e/10e, 13a 226-0010, 20a/26a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.3.2 Control panel DECO 13a 226-0001 & 20/26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3.3 Control panel DECO 13bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3.4 Main switch QS0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.4 MAIN BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4.1 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.4.2 NC ON / OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.3 Power ON / OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.4 Setting mode / Auto mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4.5 Mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.6 Axis / Channel Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.4.7 Axis feedrate override / Spindle speed override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.4.8 Coolant flowrate ON / OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4.9 Spindle collet control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.4.10 Other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.4.11 Programme key sens + / - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.4.12 Start / stop cycle and End of table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4.13 Axis Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
300493 en - 01/08 4
4. KINEMATICS – TOOL POSITIONS -

OPERATIONS – MACHINING OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4.1 9 AXIS DECO 7A/10A - 7E/10E BASIC MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4.1.1 Main equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4.1.2 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.1.3 Functions (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.1.4 Location of tool supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.2 10 AXIS DECO 13/13A 226-0001 & 13A 226-0010 BASIC MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.2.1 Main equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.2.2 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2.4 Functions (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3 6 AXIS DECO 13B/BI BASIC MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.1 Main equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.2 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3.4 Functions (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4 10 AXIS DECO 20 / 26 & 20A / 26A BASIC MACHINE VERSION 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.4.1 Main equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.4.2 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.4.4 Functions (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
300493 en - 01/08 5
5. BASIC SEQUENCE FOR STARTING / TURNING OFF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . 1

5.1 BASIC SEQUENCE FOR STARTING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
5.2 PROCEDURE DE DECLENCHEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.3 DISPLAY END-OF-BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6. ALARM ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
6.1 ALARM TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
6.2 PMC ALARM CLASSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
6.3 DISPLAY ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
6.3.1 To display the text of PMC Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
6.3.2 Display the text of other alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
6.4 CLEAR PMC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6.5 START AGAIN AFTER A PMC ALARM HAS OCCURRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6.6 CLEAR NC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
300493 en - 01/08 6
7. ALARM LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
7.1 MACHINE (PMC) ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
7.2 MACRO ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
7.3 NC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
7.3.1 Program Errors (P/S Alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
7.3.2 Absolute Pulse Coder (APC) Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.3.3 Alarmes servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.3.4 Diagnostic No.201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.3.5 Diagnostic No.200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.3.6 Diagnostic No.204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.3.7 Overtravel Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.3.8 Overheat Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.3.9 Serial Spindle Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.3.10 Diagnostic No.408 & 438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.11 Diagnostic No.409 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.12 Diagnostic No.439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.13 Alarmes spécifiques à PNC DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.4 DIAGNOSTIC 905 / 906 (CHECK COORDINATE) BY TYPE OF MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.4.1 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.4.2 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.4.3 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 13b / bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.4.4 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 20/26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.4.5 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 20a/26a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
300493 en - 01/08 7
8. BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
8.1 DOWNLOAD A PROGRAM INTO CNC OVER RS‐232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
8.1.1 Delete a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
8.1.2 Download a Program into CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8.1.3 Obligatory Program Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
8.1.4 Display programms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8.2 DOWNLOAD A PROGRAM WITH MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
8.2.1 Preparatory steps on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
8.2.2 Download a program with memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8.2.3 Convert a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.3 EDIT TOLL GEOMETRY AND WEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.3.1 Keys To Edit Tool Geometry & Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
8.3.2 Restore Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
8.4 PART INFO PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8.5 PART PROGRAM LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.5.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
8.5.2 Configuration parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.5.3 Loading from the Memory-card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.5.4 Loading from a serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.5.5 Loading from an Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.5.6 General messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
8.5.7 Messages for Memory-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8.5.8 RS232 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
8.5.9 Ethernet Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
300493 en - 01/08 8
9. MANUAL OPERATION OF MACHINE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

9.1 REFERENCE AN AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
9.2 AUTO REFERENCE ALL AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
9.3 OVERRIDE, STOP & RESTART AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
9.4 JOG AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
9.5 OPEN / CLOSE COLLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9.5.1 Display Main & Pickoff Spindle Status - Obtain No‐Pressure Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9.5.2 Putting the collets into “no pressure” state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
9.5.3 Coolant Monitoring OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
9.6 ORIENT S1‐SPINDLE FOR PROFILED PART PICKOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
9.6.1 Cancelling the old offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
9.6.2 Orient S4‐Pickoff‐Spindle at 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
9.6.3 Orient S1 for Profiled Part Pickoff with S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
9.6.4 How To Check S1 Orientation Offset Angle Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
10. CHANGE GUIDEBUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

10.1 AUXILIARY G-FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
10.1.1 Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for all DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
10.1.2 Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for DECO 7a/10a & 7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
10.2 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 7A/10A & 7E/10E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
10.3 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 13/13A 226-0001 & 13A 226-0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
10.4 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 20/20A & 26/26A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
10.5 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 13B/BI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
300493 en - 01/08 9
11. SPINDLES ROTATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

11.1 OVERRIDE, STOP & RESTART SPINDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
11.1.1 While Program is being Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
11.1.2 When program has been interrupted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
11.2 ROTATION OF SPINDLES AND ROTATING IN MDI MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
11.2.1 Spindle and rotating tool code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
11.2.2 Digital spindle programming procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
11.2.3 Programming applications table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
11.2.4 Programming procedure for analogue rotating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
300493 en - 01/08 10
12. AUXILIARY M AND G - FUNCTIONS

(PROGRAMMABLE ONLY EN MDI MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
12.1 AUXILIARY M‐FUNCTIONS ONLY FOR MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
12.1.1 (M08-M151) Specific to toutes les DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
12.1.2 (M160-M165) Specific to DECO 7a / 10a & 7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
12.1.3 (M160-M169) Specific to DECO 13 / 13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
12.1.4 (M160-M173) Specific to DECO 13b / 13bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
12.1.5 (M160-M169) Specific to DECO 20 / 26 & 20a / 26a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
12.1.6 (M170-M192) Specific to all DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12.1.7 (M203-M605) Specific to DECO 7a / 10a & 7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
12.1.9 (M203-M605) Specific to DECO 20 / 26 & 20a / 26a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
12.1.10 (M203-M605) Specific to DECO 13b / 13bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
12.1.11 (M606-M611) Pump incorporated into the machine for all DECOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
12.1.12 (M606-M611) 20 bar pump external to the machine for all DECOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
12.1.14 (M620-M895) Specific to all DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
12.2 AUXILIARY G-FUNCTIONS
(THESE FUNCTIONS ARE PERMITTED WITH THE DOORS OPEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
12.2.1 Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for all DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
12.2.2 Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for DECO 7a/10a & 7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
300493 en - 01/08 11
13. AUTO (MATIC) MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

13.1 START / STOP PROGRAM EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
13.2 DISPLAY AXIS POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
13.3 EDIT BATCH PRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
13.4 INTERRUPTION, INSPECTION DURING AN AUTO CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
13.4.1 Interrupt Over M01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
13.4.2 Interrupt Over STOP‐AT‐A‐DETERMINED‐TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
13.4.3 Interrupt Over END‐OF‐TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
13.4.4 Interrupt Over AXIS‐RETRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
13.4.5 Interrupt Over Run‐FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
13.5 M150 ADJUST FEEDRATE AT 100% OF SPINDLE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
14. SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

14.1 DESCRIPTION OF SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
14.1.1 Use “SETTING” mode when the program already runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
14.1.2 Start A Program With SETTING Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
14.1.3 Reference An Axis In SETTING Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
14.1.4 Reference All Axes In SETTING Mode (Automatic Referencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
300493 en - 01/08 12
15. CUSTOMER PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

15.1 ENABLE / DISABLE WRITE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
15.2 DISABLE X3, Z3, X4, Y4 AXES AND S3‐SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
15.2.1 Example for DECO 7a/10a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
15.2.2 Example for DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010, 20/26, 20a/26a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
15.2.3 Example for DECO 13b/13bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
15.3 END‐OF‐BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
15.4 MACHINE NO. (ALARM 1006: WRONG MACHINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
15.5 Z4 OR Z2 TORQUE LIMIT AND SERVO-LAG FOR PART‐PICKOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
15.6 DISPLAY PMC & CEXEC SOFTWARE NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
15.7 DISPLAY MACRO SOFTWARE NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
15.8 OPERATE LONG PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
15.9 ANGULAR OFFSET OF THE SPINDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
15.9.1 Adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
15.10 EDIT CNC TIME & DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
15.11 DISPLAY CRASH PAGE (EXCEPT DECO 7A/10A & 7E/10E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
15.12 PARAMETER SETTING FOR THE ETHERNET LINK ON CNC FANUC 16ITB AND (16ITA) . . 19
15.12.1 Input/output channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
15.12.2 Transfer by Ethernet link in direct connection (without passing via the network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
15.12.3 Ethernet parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
15.12.4 Enabling the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
15.12.5 Transfer of the .trf file on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
15.12.6 DHCP / DNS option on 16iTB and (16iTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
15.12.7 Configuration of connection 1, 2 or 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
15.12.8 Ethernet maintenance on 16iTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
300493 en - 01/08 13
16. OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
16.1 ORIENTED S1 / S4 OR S2 SPINDLE LOCKING CONTROL POUR DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
16.2 EXTERNAL THREAD WHIRLING SPINDLE FOR DECO 7A/10A - 7E/10E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
16.3 PART MANIPULATOR MDI CONTROL DECO 7A/10A - 7E/10E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
16.3.1 Disable Part Gripper (“Manipulator”) Function DECO 7a/10a-7e/10e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
16.4 PART GRIPPER MDI CONTROL DECO 13/13A 226-0001 / 13A 226-0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
16.4.1 Disable Part Gripper (“Manipulator”) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
16.5 PART MANIPULATOR MDI CONTROL DECO 20/26 / 20A/26A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
16.5.1 Fitting Manipulator Jaws / Cage and Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
16.5.2 Device for Monitoring Part Presence in Manipulator Jaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
16.5.3 Alarm 2032: FAULT MANIPULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
16.5.4 Disable Part Gripper (“Manipulator”) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
16.6 SENSOR MDI CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
16.6.1 M‐Codes for Laser Sensor MDI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
16.6.2 M‐Codes for Mechanical Sensor MDI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
16.7 MDI CONTROL FOR PICKOFF SPINDLE'S THRU‐COOLANT FLUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
16.8 ADDITIONAL M‐FUNCTIONS FOR MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
16.9 DEEP DRILLING CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
16.9.1 Disable M894 Deep Drilling Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
16.10 15 OR 20 BAR PUMP CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
16.11 PARTS SELECTOR FOR DECO 7A/10A-7E/10E / 13/ 13A 226-0001 & 13A 226-0010 . . . . . 22
16.12 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
16.12.1 Inputting tool wear variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
300493 en - 01/08 14
16.12.2 To display the abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

16.12.3 Changing a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
16.12.4 Initialising tool variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
16.12.5 RS 232 inputting / outputting of tool wear variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
16.13 AUTOMATIC PREHEATING OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
16.13.1 Starting up the « manual preheating” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
16.13.2 Starting up the “automatic preheating” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
16.13.3 Shutting off the « automatic preheating” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
16.13.4 Data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
16.13.5 Changing the time and date 0n the CNC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
16.14 MULTIPROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
16.14.1 Access to the MultiProgram function page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
16.14.2 Data entry mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
16.14.3 Selection of the downloading source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
16.14.4 MultiProgram function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
16.14.5 LOOP function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
16.14.6 Starting the Multi Program function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
300493 en - 01/08 15
17. CUSTOMER INTERFACE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

17.1 OPTIONAL SOCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
17.1.1 Optional Socket Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
17.1.2 Optional Socket Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
17.1.3 Programming Optional Socket 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
17.1.4 Programming Optional Socket 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
17.2 EXAMPLES OF APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
17.2.1 KIENZLE Productivity Monitor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
17.2.2 Sensor Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
17.2.3 Drill Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
17.2.4 Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
17.2.5 Single‐Acting Piston Control Monitored by Two Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
17.2.6 Double‐Acting Piston Control Monitored by Two Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
17.3 OPTIONAL SOCKET DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
17.3.1 Recap of Logical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
17.3.2 Optional Socket Configuration Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
17.3.3 Enable / Disable Flags for Optional Socket Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
18. MAINTENANCE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

18.1 MAINTENANCE EVERY 500, 1500 AND 2500 HOURS' OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
18.2 MAINTENANCE EVERY 1000 AND 2000 HOURS' OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
18.3 MAINTENANCE EVERY 3000 HOURS' OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
300493 en - 01/08 16
1. GENERALITIES 1.2 ADDRESSES

TORNOS S.A. TORNOS TECHNOLOGIES
IBERICA
1.1 General information
Rue Industrielle 111 Pol. Ind. El Congost
This document is written based on the information available at the moment CH-2740 MOUTIER / SUISSE Avda. St Julia, 206 Nave 8
of its publication. Tél. 032 / 494 44 44 E-08400 GRANOLLERS
Fax 032 / 494 49 03 Tel. (34) 93 846 59 43
Fax (34) 93 849 66 00
TORNOS S.A. may not be held responsible, however, in case of errors or
omissions. TORNOS-TECHNOLOGIES TORNOS TECHNOLOGIES
DEUTSCHLAND ITALIA SRL
Karlsruher Str. 38 Via Einstein, 24
The original language of this document is French. D-75179 PFORZHEIM I-20090 ASSAGO / MI
Tel. 07231/ 910 70 Tel. 02 45 77 17 01
Fax 07231/ 910 750 Fax 02 45 70 16 48
The information contained in this document is the property of TORNOS S.A.,
which is intended exclusively for internal customer usage, and may not be dis‐ TORNOS TECHNOLOGIES TORNOS TECHNOLOGIES
closed to or reproduced for third parties. FRANCE US CORPORATION
Boîte postale 330 70 Pocono Road PO. Box 325
ST-PIERRE EN FAUCIGNY BROOKFIELD CT 06804 / USA
1.1.1 Conformity to standards and directives F74807 LA ROCHE Tel. (203) 775-4319
S / FORON CEDEX Fax (203) 775-4281
Tél. 04 50 038 333
Fax 04 50 038 907
The CE‐marking i indicates that this product conforms with the
European standards of safety, health, environment and protection. TORNOS TECHNOLOGIES TORNOS SHANGHAI
UK Ltd REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
Tornos House Tower B, Office 512-513
Whitwick Business Park Coalville Far East International Plaza
Leicestershire
No. 319 Xianxia Road
LE67 4JQ
Tel. 01530 513100 CN-SHANGHAI 200335
Fax 01 530 814212 Tel. +86 21-62351235
Fax +86 21-62351938
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 1.2 /1

1.3 DIFFERENTIATION OF DEGREES OF RISK 1.4 IMPORTANT SAFETY INDICATIONS

These instructions indicate a number of safety measure symbols which
appear also on the machine and are intended to protect the user, his/her
effects and the environment from injuries and damage as applicable. Δ Warning !
Below, you will find the safety symbols, their headings and definitions. Please, Read the instruction before operating the machine.
read these first before you continue.
Should the user disregard the instructions of this manual, TORNOS SA
declines any liability whatsoever.
Δ Danger !
indicates a direct danger of death or serious injury.
Δ Warning ! . Attention !
indicates an object or action which may cause death or serious Certain maintenance works are absolutely necessary to ensure good
injury. operation of the machine. They are given in the MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE on the machine
Δ Caution ! (or see Instructions: OPERATION‐MAINTENANCE).
indicates an object or action which may cause injury or serious
damage.
. Attention !
indicates incorrect actions or such that may cause damage.
. Attention !
⊗ Prohibition ! TORNOS SA disclaims all responsibility for any modifications carried
indicates an action or operation prohibited because of evident or out by the customer to the machine, and to its related equipment and
alleged hazards. software, without agreement ratified by TORNOS SA.
⇒ Info :
Gives information or comment related to safety.
Note :
Gives information unrelated to safety
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 1.4 /2

2. PRECAUTIONARY NOTES BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 SAFETY WITH DOORS OPEN
Operation with doors open

. Caution !
A battery backup is provided for storage of the part programs in the numer‐ Axes reference :
ical control while it is off. Is prohibited with the doors open.
When BAT message appears down on the display, the numerical control Axis removal function:
must not be turned off before replacing the backup battery. Is prohibited with the doors open.
THE BACKUP BATTERY TO BE REPLACED WHILE THE NUMERICAL
CONTROL IS ENERGIZED. Spindle and counter spindle rotation:
If you turn the NC off while replacing the battery, all your programs will be Maximum 50 rpm. in MDI mode with the doors open.
irretrievably deleted and the NC will have to be completely reinitialized. Operation of the rotating tools:
Change the battery annually. Is prohibited with the doors open in MDI mode.
Movement of the axes in JOG:
Is authorised with the doors open.
Δ Warning !
Open and reclose the central hatch each and every time the machine is Programming of M auxiliary functions in MDI :
started. This procedure is an obligatory check on the correct operation Refer to chapter 12 for M functions authorised in MDI with the doors open.
of the hatch switches.
Automatic mode:
In automatic mode, the key on setting mode stops the part program.
Opening of the doors stops the spindles, stops the turning tools and turns off
spraying.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 2.1 /1

In automatic mode, the key on setting mode, in the following conditions: 2.2 APPLICATION OF FANUC VERSIONS
- opening the doors Machines Versions
DECO 7a / 10a FANUC 16i TA
- the «+ program direction» key (forward function) as well as the F2 DECO13 FANUC 16i TA
key pressed at the same time
DECO 13a - 226-0001 FANUC 16i TA
is used to run the program at 5% of programmed feeds without spindle and
turning tool rotations. DECO 13a - 226-0010 FANUC 16i TB
DECO 20 / 26 FANUC 16i TA
In automatic mode, closing of the doors then the
DECO 20a / 26a FANUC 16i TA
DECO 13bi FANUC 16i TA
«Start spraying» key pressed restarts spraying.
DECO 20a - 0018 / 0020 FANUC 16i TB
In automatic mode, the key on setting mode, doors closed, the DECO 26a - 0020 FANUC 16i TB
DECO 7a/10a - 0015 - 19 FANUC 16i TB
«+ program direction» key (forward key) restarts spraying, spindle
DECO 7e/10e - 0017 FANUC 16i TB
rotation, turning tool rotation and runs the program at 5% of programmed
feeds.
When the workpiece programme is run in adjustment mode with the doors 2.3 REFERENCE ICONS
open, some functions such as the manipulator arm, the piston, the ejector, are
inhibited. Refer to chapter 12 for M functions not authorised with the doors Icons Key Description
open..
NC keybord icon
In automatic mode, the key on setting mode, doors closed, CYCLE START
Screen and softkeys icon

or«+ program direction» forward key pressed reactivates the M
functions.
Function ordering icon.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 2.3 /2

3. USER INTERFACE
3.1 LOCATION OF INTERFACES ON MACHINES

3.1.1 DECO 7a/10a & 7e/10e
6
5
2
4
3
8
9
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.1.1 /1

3.1.2 DECO 13a 226-0010 3.1.3 DECO 13bi
1 HL1
1 3
2 3
4
9
10
6
5
8
9
5
8
11
6 4 7
7
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.1.3 /2

3.1.4 DECO 20a & 26a

HL1
10
9
8
1 2 3 4 6
7
6 Service Socket 230V 50Hz XS1

COMPONENTS for programming peripheral only
Pos. Description 7 Mains Connection
1 Control Panel AR90 8 Main Switch QS0
2 NC Screen AR1 9 Barfeeder Socket XS94
3 NC Keyboard AR3 10 Socket for pump, cooling system XS42
4 Socket RS232 11 2 x Batteries
5 Hour Counter PT1 HL1 Signalling lamp; lamp delivered dismounted with ist socket.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.1.4 /3

3.2 NC KEYBOARD (PROGRAMMING)FANUC 16i TA & TB
For DECO 13/13a-226-0001

For DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
For DECO 7a/10a & DECO 13a 226-0010
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.2 /4

Display all axis positions (in Channel 1 only!). for

POS Display axis position (in Channel 1 only!). DECO 13/13a 226-0001, 13b/13bi, 20/26,
CUSTOM 20a/26a).
Display start screen for the SBF 532 and SBF 216
Program input / output via Peripheral Socket
PROG feeders.
RS‐232.
ALTER Replace a chain of characters with another one.

OFFSET Display tool offset.
SETTING
INSERT Enter data in NC.
SHIFT Edit 2nd functions of alphanumeric panel.
Delete one or more characters when editing or mod‐
DELETE ifying a program.
CAN Cancel one or more characters.
Page UP. Application according to operating mode.

INPUT Enter data in NC. PAGE
Page UP. Application according to operating mode.

SYSTEM Access to NC data. PAGE
MESSAGE Display messages or alarms. Move cursor on the screen.
CUSTOM Display all axis positions (in Channel 1 only!). for

GRAPH DECO 7a/10a & 7e/10e, 13a 226-0010).
Display alarms in detail, NC operation tips, table of
HELP
parameters.
GRAPH not used
Clear alarms, stop program run, initialize program
RESET
start.
Block end...
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.2 /5

3.3 CONTROL PANEL (PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTORS)
3.3.1 Control panel 7a/10a &7e/10e, 13a 226-0010, 20a/26a

2.4.2
NC control
2.4.3
2.4.1 Power control
Emergency stop button
2.4.5 2.4.7 Other functions

Mode selector
2.4.4
2.4.6
Setting mode / auto
Axis and channel selector mode selector
2.4.8
Axis override
2.4.7 Other functions
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.3.1 /6

3.3.2 Control panel DECO 13a 226-0001 & 20/26 3.3.3 Control panel DECO 13bi
2.4.1 Emergency stop button
2.4.2 NC control
2.4.3 Power control

2.4.4 Setting mode / auto mode
selector
2.4.8 Axis override
2.4.5 Mode selector
2.4.6 Axis and channel selector
2.4.7 Other functions
Commande DECO 13a 226-0001 & 20/26
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.3.3 /7

3.3.4 Main switch QS0

Location Key Description
Main Switch is ON :
Machine control cabinet is energized.
Fans are working.
NC can be turned on..
Main Switch is OFF: all the machine members are dead. All the machine members are dead.
. Attention
After turning the machine off, wait 10 sec before you turn it on again.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.3.4 /8

3.4 MAIN BUTTONS

Emergency stop button
NC is ON and the machine members can be controlled.
NC is OFF and all machine members are dead.
Power ON
Power OFF
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4 /9

3.4.1 Emergency stop
Δ Caution !
The emergency stop button when pressed, halts instantaneously and in a controlled manner all actions of the machine.
The button then locks and must be turned clockwise or pulled (acc. to model) to unlock.
The use of Emergency Stop has the following consequences:
Axes lock immediately.

Spindles stop immediately.
Axes power is off.
Spindle power is off.
Note :
The emergency stop sequence is controlled by the software.
The machine power too is cut off by an electric safety device after 3 seconds.
To restart after the use of the emergency stop proceed as follows :
Turn clockwise or pull (acc. to model) to unlock.
Press to clear alarm given by emergency stop.
Turn machine power ON.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.1 /10

3.4.2 NC ON / OFF
NC is ON and the machine members can be controlled.
NC is OFF and all machine members are dead.

Δ Caution !
Do not turn NC off (with Main Switch) when machining to avoid damage to the work and/or tools.
3.4.3 Power ON / OFF
⇒ Info :
Before opening a hatch, set the power OFF or switch to SETTING mode.
Otherwise, opening the hatch may cause damage to the work and/or tools.
When you press POWER ON button :

POWER OFF pushbutton light indicator is off.
NC axes are energized and set in position.
Axes monitoring is on.
Possible functions: axis movement
auxiliary M, S Functions
program start.
When you press POWER OFF button :
POWER OFF pushbutton light indicator is on.
NC axes are dead and off position.
Axes monitoring is off.
Δ Caution !
Do not turn power off when machining to avoid damage to the work and/or tools.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.3 /11

3.4.4 Setting mode / Auto mode selector

In auto mode,...
...when the key is on ”SETTING”, you have the possibility of working with the doors open with reduced work feeds, while
keeping the ”PROGRAM + DIRECTION” button pressed.
Turn the key to this position, i.e. to its regular position for program execution with the hatches closed.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.4 /12

3.4.5 Mode selector

Select EDIT mode to enter a program in NC.Power must be on to activate this mode.
Select AUTO mode to execute part program. Power must be on to activate this mode.
Select MDI mode (manual data input) to execute M, S Functions.
Select JOG mode (motion) to displace manually an axis selected with Axis / Channel Selector.
Select INCREMENTAL axis mode (motion) to move by
x1, x10, x1 ==> 0,0001mm,
x10 ==> 0,001mm,
x100, x1K x100 ==> 0,01mm,
x1k ==> 0,1mm
an axis selected with Axis / Channel Selector.
Select AXIS BY AXIS REFERENCING mode to reference an axis selected with Axis / Channel Selector.
Select AUTOMATIC REFERENCING mode to reference all axes.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.5 /13

3.4.6 Axis / Channel Selector

Select Channel 2 for MDI only (manual data input). Any other selector setting selects Channel 1.
X1...to...Y4 Select X1,X2, ... Y4 axis for JOG / INCR(EMENTAL) / REF(ERENCING) mode.
3.4.7 Axis feedrate override / Spindle speed override

AXIS FEEDRATE OVERRIDE from 0 to 100% by 1% steps.
For all axes :
[-] decrementation from 100 to 0%,
[+] incrementation from 0 to 100%,
See also Chapter “Axes Override”.
SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE from 50 to 120% by 1% steps.
For S1‐S2‐S4‐S5 spindles :
[-] decrementation from 120 to 50%,
[+] incrementation from 50 to 120%,
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.7 /14

3.4.8 Coolant flowrate ON / OFF

Note : Spraying cannot be enabled with the doors open.
Coolant ON.
Coolant OFF.
Change coolant flowrate.

Note :
In AUTOMATIC mode, it is possible to halt the coolant by pressing stop cycle then the “stop coolant” button.
To avoid accidents with tools or with the part, the coolant rate is monitored by a pressure switch.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.8 /15

3.4.9 Spindle collet control

Open main spindle collet.
Close main spindle collet.
Open pickoff spindle collet.
Close pickoff spindle collet.
3.4.10Other functions
F1 Reserve button (Function 1)
Doors open automatically (setting mode), ”F2” and ”PROGRAMME + DIRECTION” keys pressed simultaneously to allow
F2 the program to start in forward motion (FORWARD function).
Clear Alarm :
F3 2036 Alarm of sensor for long part ejection
2032 Alarme of manipulator (for DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.10 /16

3.4.11 Programme key sens + / -

Doors shut automatically, After having pressed the cycle stop button or in setting mode the + PROGRAM
DIRECTION key is used to run the program forward at 5% of programmed feeds (FORWARD function).
Doors open automatically (setting mode), ”PROGRAMME + DIRECTION” and ”F2” keys allow the program to start in for‐
F2 ward motion (FORWARD function).
Move selected axis in [+] direction

in JOG / INCR(EMENTAL) / REF(ERENCING) mode.
Move selected axis in [-] direction in JOG / INCR(EMENTAL) / REF(ERENCING) mode.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.11 /17

3.4.12Start / stop cycle and End of table

CYCLE START
Start program in AUTO mode.
Execute M, S Functions in MDI mode.
END‐OF‐TABLE Stop program at the end‐of‐table in AUTO mode.
When activated the pushbutton (light) comes on.
CYCLE STOP Stop program execution in AUTO mode.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.12 /18

3.4.13Axis Override Switch
But: VControl axis speed from 0 to 100%

Note : The axis override switch must be stated ( keeprelay ) before enabled.
Position 0
Axis override switch on 0 : The following pushbuttons on operator panel are active.
Different positions
If axis override switch on any position other than 0, selector is enabled an pushbuttons on operator panel are disabled.
Reactivate the pushbuttons
To reactivate pushbuttons on operator panel after operating axis override switch:
Turn selector to position 0,
At the same time push the buttons on operator panel. Axis override switch is set to 100%.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.13 /19

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4.13 /20

4. KINEMATICS – TOOL POSITIONS - OPERATIONS – MACHINING OPERATIONS
4.1 9 AXIS DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e BASIC MACHINE
4.1.1 Main equipment
Name Positions Operations – machining operations
- Main spindle: S1 Drilling - Positioning - Axis C - Synchronisation - Threading - Polygoning (with S2)
- Pickoff spindle: S4 Drilling - Positioning - Axis C - Synchronisation - Threading
- Frontwork gang: S3 Drilling (DECO 7a/10a - 0009 CNC 16i TA)
- Frontwork gang: S3 Drilling (DECO 7a/10a - 0015 - 0019 CNC 16i TB) (Analogue controlled spindle)
Not for DECO 7e/10e-0017
- Backwork gang: S5 Drilling (Analogue controlled spindle) (DECO 7a/10a - 0009 CNC 16i TA)
- Backwork gang: S5 Drilling - Positioning - Axis C - Synchronisation - Threading - Polygoning (with S4)
(DECO 7a/10a - 0015 - 0019 CNC 16i TB and DECO 7e/10e-0017)
- Mainwork gang 1: --
- Mainwork gang 2: S2 Drilling - Polygoning (with S1)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.1.1 /1

4.1.2 Kinematics 4.1.3 Functions (T)
Tools on Mainwork Gang 1

1st geometry 2nd geometry Support
T11 T15 11
T12 T16 12
+ T13 T17 13
X4 T14 T18 14
- Tools on Mainwork Gang 2
- +
Z4 Z1 1st geometry 2nd geometry Support
+ -
+ T21 T25 21
X2
--
X1 T22 T26 22
+
T23 T27 23
T24 T28 24
+ Tools on Frontwork Gang (Not for DECO 7e/10e)
+
Y2
Z3 - 1st geometry 2nd geometry Support
+ Y1
+ - T31 T34 31
X3 -
- T32 T35 32
156504
T33 T36 33
Tools on Backwork Gang
T41 T45 41
T42 T46 42
T43 T47 43
T44 T48 44
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.1.3 /2

4.1.4 Location of tool supports
Backwork gang
Frontwork Mainwork gangs 1 & 2

gang
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.1.4 /3

4.2 10 AXIS DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010 BASIC MACHINE
Name Positions Operations - machining operations
- Pickoff spindle: S4 Drilling - Positioning - Axis C - Synchronisation - Threading - Polygoning (with S5)
- Frontwork gang: S3 Drilling (Analogue controlled spindle)
- Backwork gang: S5 Drilling - Polygoning (with S4)
- Mainwork gang 1: (S6) Drilling (Analogue controlled spindle)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.2.1 /4

4.2.2 Kinematics
217765
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.2.2 /5

Contre‐opérations longit. Contre‐opérations tramsv.

Achsial‐RückWZsatz Radial‐RückWZsatz
Axial Backwork Gang Radial Backwork Gang
Contre‐broche S4
Abgreifspindel S4
Pickoff Spindle S4
Broche poupée S1
Hauptspindel S1
Main Spindle S1
Appareil en bout
FrontWZsatz
Frontwork Gang
Peigne X2Y2 Peigne X1Y1

HauptWZsatz X2Y2 HauptWZsatz X1Y1
X2Y2 Mainwork Gang X1Y1 Mainwork Gang
199226f1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.2.3 /6

4.2.4 Functions (T)
Tools on Mainwork Gang 1 Axial backwork Gang tools
1st geometry 2nd geometry Support 1st geometry 2nd geometry Support
T11 T16 11 T41 T44 41
T12 T17 12 T42 T45 42
T13 T18 13 T43 T46 43
T14 T19 14
T15 T20 15 Radial backwork gang tools
T21 T26 21 T51 T54 51
T22 T27 22 T52 T55 52
T23 T28 23 T53 T56 53
T24 T29 24
T25 T30 25
Tools on Frontwork Gang T40 Tailstock geometry on part pickoff.
1st geometry 2nd geometry Support T50 Jaw or basket geometry on extraction.
T31 T35 31
T32 T36 32
T33 T37 33
T34 T38 34
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.2.4 /7

4.3 6 AXIS DECO 13b/bi BASIC MACHINE
- Frontwork gang: ---
- Backwork gang: S5 Drilling (Analogue controlled spindle)
- Mainwork gang: S3 Drilling - Polygoning (with S1)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.3.1 /8

4.3.2 Kinematics
240010f1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.3.2 /9

Contre‐broche S2 Contre‐opérations
Abgreifspindel S2 RückWZsatz
Pickoff Spindle S2 Contre‐opérations Backwork Gang
RückWZsatz
Backwork Gang
Werkstuckaustossposition
Part Catcher
Canon
Führungsbüchse
Guidebush
Broche poupée S1
Hauptspindel S1
Main Spindle S1
Appareil en bout
FrontWZsatz
Frontwork Gang Peigne X2Y2Z2 Peigne X1Y1
HauptWZsatz X2Y2Z2 HauptWZsatz X1Y1
X2Y2Z2 Mainwork Gang X1Y1 Mainwork Gang
Contre‐opérations
RückWZsatz
Contre‐broche S2 Backwork Gang
Abgreifspindel S2
Pickoff Spindle S2 Werkstuckaustossposition
199228f1
Part Catcher
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.3.3 /10

4.3.4 Functions (T)
T11 T16 11 T41 T44 41
T12 T17 12 T42 T45 42

T13 T18 13 T43 T46 43
T14 T19 14
T15 T20 15
T40 Tailstock geometry on part pickoff.
T50 Gutter geometry for part output
T21 T24 21
T22 T25 22
T23 T26 23
Tools on Frontwork Gang

T31 T34 31
T32 T35 32
T33 T36 33
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.3.4 /11

4.4 10 AXIS DECO 20 / 26 & 20a / 26a BASIC MACHINE VERSION 10

- Frontwork gang: S3 Drilling
- Backwork gang: S5 Drilling (Analogue controlled spindle)
- Mainwork gang1: (S6) Drilling (Analogue controlled spindle)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.4.1 /12

4.4.2 Kinematics
217870f1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.4.2 /13


Backwork gang S5 T51 T52 T53
X4
Y4
Z4
T44 T43 T42 T41

S4
Y1
X3 S2 Y2
Z1
Z3 X2 X1
S4
T21 T11
T22 T12
T31 S1 T23 T13
S3 T32 T24 T14
T33 T25 T15
T34
Mainwork gangs 2 Mainwork gangs 1
Frontwork gang
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.4.3 /14

4.4.4 Functions (T)
T11 T16 11 T41 T45 41
T12 T17 12 T42 T46 42
T13 T18 13 T43 T47 43
T14 T19 14 T44 T48 44
T15 T20 15
Tools on Mainwork Gang 2 Radial backwork gang tools
T21 T26 21 T51 T54 51
T22 T27 22 T52 T55 52
T23 T28 23 T53 T56 53
T24 T29 24
T25 T30 25
Tools on Frontwork Gang T40 Tailstock geometry on part pickoff.
1st geometry 2nd geometry Support T50 Jaw or basket geometry on extraction.
T31 T35 31
T32 T36 32
T33 T37 33
T34 T38 34
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.4.4 /15

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 4.4.4 /16

5. BASIC SEQUENCE FOR STARTING / TURNING OFF THE MACHINE
5.1 BASIC SEQUENCE FOR STARTING THE MACHINE

Note : Observe chronological order for starting the machine.
To start with: Main Switch is OFF :
All the machine members are dead.
Location To press key Description of actions Notes
. Attention !
Action 1 After turning the machine off, wait 10 sec before you turn
it on again.
- Main Switch is ON : (QSO in position 1)
Action 2
- Press NC ON pushbutton The machine members can be controlled.
Action 3
POWER OFF pushbutton light indicator is off.
- Press POWER ON pushbutton
Note : Δ Caution !
POWER ON is not possible unless the machine hatches Before opening a hatch, set the power OFF or switch to
are closed or the key on the control panel is turned over SETTING mode.
to SETTING mode. Otherwise, opening the hatch may cause damage to the
work and/or tools.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 5.1 /1

5.2 PROCEDURE DE DECLENCHEMENT
Action 1 Note :Observe chronological order for turning off the

machine.
- Check status of barfeeder
. Attention ! Before turning off the machine check:

1 - status of barfeeder (see paragraph 4.2: “Display End-of-bar”.). It must be “END-OF-BAR” INACTIVE.
2 - if barfeeder status is “END-OF-BAR” ACTIVE, do not turn off the machine.
Wait till feeding of a new bar is over. “END-OF-BAR” INACTIVE.
Action 2 Interrupt program execution at END‐OF‐TABLE.End-of-

table pushbutton light indicator is on when activated. Press
- Push pushbutton “END-OF-TABLE”.
again, to disable this function. The pushbutton light
When the machine is stopped at END-OF-TABLE, ... indicator comes off.
Δ Caution !
Action 3 Do not turn NC off (with Main Switch) when machining to
- Turn off Power. avoid damage to the work and/or tools.
Action 4 Δ Caution !
- Turn off NC. Do not turn NC off (with Main Switch) when machining to
avoid damage to the work and/or tools.
Action 5 . Attention !
After turning the machine off, wait 10 sec before you turn
- Turn off main switch
it on again.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 5.2 /2

If however an End‐of‐Bar is sensed, the following page opens :

5.3 DISPLAY END-OF-BAR
MODE - MDI O0002
Object: Display END-OF-BAR activation.
N01365
Location To press key Description of actions END-OF-BAR
ACTIVE
OR “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH”
PARTS BEFORE
BAR CHANGE - 4
(BAR) (BAR)
INPUT END-OF-BAR X....... - INACTIVE-
In regular operation, i.e. when no End‐of‐Bar is sensed, the following

page opens : FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100%
MODE - AUTO O0002

MDI **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1
N01365
END-OF-BAR ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Note :
INACTIVE Screen not used if the SBF-532 feeder is fitted to the DECO 20/26 &
20a/26a.
Note :
END-OF-BAR ACTIVE indicates that input end‐of‐bar has been
detected : the machine remains active until loading a new bar.
INPUT END-OF-BAR X....... - INACTIVE- PARTS BEFORE BAR CHANGE - indicates the number of parts still to
be produced before bar change. This number is loaded when an end‐of‐
FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100% bar is detected.
5 0 INPUT END‐OF‐BAR permits setting of the end‐of‐bar signal.
T0000 State Options: BARFEEDER and CONSTANT THRUST for ROBOBAR
MDI **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1 SSF226.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 5.3 /3

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 5.3 /4

6. ALARM ORGANIZATION 6.2 PMC ALARM CLASSES
6.1 ALARM TYPES Five classes of alarm importance are available, Class 4 being the most seri‐
ous.
The message of Class 0 is automatically deleted on the disappearance of
The following two alarm types are available : cause.
- Alarms coming from the machine, called PMC alarms, If several Alarms Class 0 or 1 turn up simultaneously, the first one is the only
- Alarms coming from the numerical control, called NC alarms, one displayed. If higher class alarms are produced, only the first four are dis‐
played. Alarms Class 0 and 1 are displayed in a location different from those
of higher classes.
PMC alarms are classified in 5 levels of importance according to how they
affect operation of the machine :
After certain time, each alarm, if not cleared, has its class progressed accord‐
- Class 0 : Machine is in no way affected. ing to the following pattern :
Some of these alarms remain active for 5 seconds and then disappear.
Others persist until the cause is eliminated. - Class 0 keeps on being 0.
- Class 1 : Cycle stops at end-of-part. - Class 1 turns into Class 4 after a period determined
by Timer No. 0 (10 minutes)
- Class 2 : Cycle stops instantaneously.
- Class 2 turns into Class 4 after a period determined
- Class 3 : Cycle and spindles stop instantaneously. by Timer No. 0 (10 minutes)
- Class 4 : Cycle and hydraulic power stop instantaneously. - Class 3 turns into Class 4 after a period determined
by Timer No. 0 (10 minutes)
Example of PMC alarm : Alarm coming from pressostat, sensor, etc.
Example of NC alarm : Alarm caused by an error in programming or in data
Note :
transfer, etc.
To modify the time on Timer No 0, select MDI mode. Then press SYSTEM
key and the keys of PMC, PMCPRM and TIMER functions. Set the cursor
on Timer No. 0, enter the value in ms and press INPUT to confirm the time
entered.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 6.2 /1

6.3 DISPLAY ALARMS 6.3.1 To display the text of PMC Alarm
Location To press key Description of actions

While the machine is under alarm or is not in cycle Red Lamp flashes as in
diagram below :
“MESSAGE” (MSG)
500ms
MSG (MSG)
ON
6.3.2 Display the text of other alarm types
OFF
“MESSAGE” (MSG)
500ms
For PMC Alarm Class 4 : Red Lamp is permanently on.

ALARM (ALARM)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 6.3.2 /2

6.4 CLEAR PMC ALARMS 6.5 START AGAIN AFTER A PMC ALARM HAS OCCURRED
Class What happens ? Conditions
Principle: for restarting
Any deficiency in machine operation is detected by the PMC of the NC. 4 Immediate feed hold. Alarm reset.
The alarm is displayed on NC Screen and can, according to class, block
Reading a new block is Axes power ON.
the machine operation to a lesser or greater extent.
stopped.
Motors ON.
The alarm text appears in English, German, French, Italian or Spanish.
Cycle stop.
For alarm description see next Para.. Cycle start.
Motors of spindles, lubrication
To clear a PMC alarm :- Eliminate the cause thereof end press the
system and drilling attach‐
key
ments stop.
Location To press key Description of actions Axes power stop.
“RESET” 3 Immediate feed hold. Alarm reset.

to reinitialize NC and Part Program. Reading a new block is Motors ON.
stopped.
Cycle start.
Cycle stop.
Motors of spindles, lubrication
system and drilling attach‐
ments stop.
2 Immediate feed hold. Alarm reset.

Reading a new block is Cycle start.
stopped.
Cycle stop.
1 Cycle stop at end-of-part Alarm reset.

Cycle start.
0 None
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 6.5 /3

6.6 CLEAR NC ALARMS >>>
Principle:
Any error concerning NC, such as error of programming, of data transfer,
of axis displacement, etc. is displayed on NC Screen. From case to
case, any error can interrupt the machine operation to a lesser or greater
extent.
To clear an alarm, eliminate the cause thereof and then press this key...
“RESET”
to reinitialize NC- and part program.
Note :
If the alarm does not disappear on
pressing RESET, turn the machine
power supply OFF and then ON.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 6.6 /4

7. ALARM LISTS
7.1 MACHINE (PMC) ALARMS
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /1

ÁÁÁÁ
Legend
ÁÁÁÁX Alarm specific to the machine
AL. CL. NAME CAUSES DECO APPLICATION

7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
1000 3 Tool breakage Sensor 1 Sensor 1 detected a broken tool X X X X X X X X
1001 3 PART presence Sensor 1 Sensor 1 detected a part X X X X X X X X
Downloaded Program No. does not correspond to actual
1006 3 Wrong machine X X X X X X X X
Machine No.
One of these options has not been stated :
- TB-DECO option not declared, see TB-DECO assist‐
ance
- Sensor 1
- Sensor 2
- Sensor 3
- S1 positioning
1007 3 Option not available - S4 positioning X X X X X X X X
- S1 in C‐axis
- S4 in C‐axis
- Axes movement in MDI
- TRANSMIT
- The CEXEC V03-0001 was installed whereas the
PMC
does not have the right version.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /2


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
Guidebush change in After G400 guidebush change, a G40X is obligatory to reset
1008 0 X X X X X X X X
progress software limit switches.
1009 4 FAULT circuit breaker Circuit breaker is open. X X X X X X X X
FAULT VAR.SPEED
Defective variable speed controller for coolant motor.
1010 4 CTRLR FORCOOLNT OR X X X X X X X X
Coolant controller or counter-operation or S5 / S6 faulty.
S5 / S6
2011 0 Message on option socket Optional socket message present. X X X X X X X X
Alarm Class 1 option
2012 1 Optional socket alarm Class 1 present. X X X X X X X X
socket
Alarm Class 3 option
1013 3 Optional socket alarm Class 3 present. X X X X X X X X
socket
0 Open spindle collet
1014 Open collet for referencing. X X X X X X X X
0 Open pickoff spindle collet
2015 0 DOOR open Hatch or guard is open. X X X X X X X X
Coolant pressure min.
1016 3 Coolant pressure is too low. X X X X X X X X
value
2017 0 FAULT coolant Pressostat Coolant pressostat indicates 1 when coolant pump is off. X X X X X X X X
1018 4 Alarm present for 10 min Alarm Class 1 to 3 present for 10 min X X X X X X X X
1019 0 Air pressure LOW No or not enough compressed air (alarm after power is on). X X X X X X X X
Coolant pressostat indicates at 0 all the time (alarm in cycle
1020 3 FAULT compress air X X X X X X X X
if pressure drops longer than 3 s).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /3


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
2021 1, 3 FAULT chip conveyor Signal Chip Conveyor OK is absent (conveyor locked). X X X X X X X X
Emergency stop
1022 4 Conveyor emergency stop is depressed. X X X X X X X X
chip conveyor
2023 0 Loading in progress Loading a new bar. X X X X X X X X
Tube / FEEDER not rdy
1024 0 Tube not initialized or electric defect of tube / barfeeder. X X X X X X X X
for machining
1025 4 FAULT Tube / Feeder Error in bar feeding or defect of tube / barfeeder. X X X X X X X X
2026 0 Endofbar Active end‐of‐bar (hydraulic & mechanical tubes). X X X X X X X X
2026 3 Endofbar Long parts X X X X X X X
On the CNC, I/O card: one or more drill command outputs
1027 3 Drill CMD output defective X X
are defective.
Check NSK inputs: X0000.2 NSK 1
X0000.0 NSK 2
1027 3 FAULT NSK SPINDLE X X X X X X
X0000.6 NSK 3
X0000.4 NSK 4
2028 0 BATCH finished Number or parts to be produced has been reached. X X X X X X X X
CRASH RISK X3-X4 The 2029 alarm is active only in JOG-INCR-MDI mode.The X
2029 3 anti-collision surveillance system has detected that the dis‐ X
tance between the two axes is not large enough.
CRASH RISK X3-X4, Y4
1029 3 Risk of collision. Stop and release the axes X X
or Z4
CRASH RISK The X3-X4 anti-collision surveillance system has detected
that the distance between the two axes is not large enough.
1029 3 Y4-X3, X4-Z4 The X4-Y4-Z4 anti-collision surveillance system has X X X
detected a distance between the T51-T53 pickoff tool holder
and the Z4 axis which is not large enough.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /4


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
The X2-Y2-Z2 anti-collision surveillance system has
CRASH RISK detected that the distance between the
1029 3 X
X2-Z2 T11-T12-T13-T14-T15 pickoff tool holder and Z2 axis is not
large enough.
Release the manipulator
2029 3 M163 and/or M167 functions X X
in MDI mode
1) Axes referencing has not been carried out correctly (one
or several axes not referenced).
G28 AND AXIS NOT REF‐ 2) In Page: STATE AXIS axes are stated INACTIVE while
1030 3 X X X X X X X X
ERENCED they are not referenced.
3) Axes stated INACTIVE in Page: STATE AXIS are more
than 2 mm away from the reference position.
1031 3 Z4 CRASH Torque limit put the axis off. X X X X X X X
1031 3 Z2 CRASH Torque limit put the axis off. X
PART IN GRIPPER / M169:
1032 3 X X X
PICKOFF COLLET Part detected in part disposal gripper (if available).
M84:
PART IN GRIPPER /
1032 3 Part ejector piston advance too short and part detected in X X X X
PICKOFF COLLET
pickoff spindle.
M168:
1033 3 PART NOT IN GRIPPER X X X
Part not in gripper.
2032 2 Manipulator fault Swivel or part present / absent ctrl fault X X
Programme incorrectly
2033 0 Programme input has been interrupted X X
input
FAULT DEEP‐DRILLING
1035 3 Level or pressure for deep drilling not OK. X X X X X X X X
PUMP
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /5


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
A miniswitch not activated on ejector motion.
Check inputs:
ALARM SENSOR FOR M186 X8.2 = 1 X8.0 = 0

2036 2 M187 X8.2 = 0 X8.0 = 1 X X X X X X X X
LONG‐PART EJECTION
M188 X9.2 = 1 X9.0 = 0
M189 X9.2 = 0 X9.0 = 1
F3 key : Press to clear alarm.
ALARM SENSOR FOR When the long part ejector moves, a switch has not been
2036 2
LONG‐PART EJECTION activated.
1) Program conversion interrupted, CYCLE START locked.
Recommence program conversion.
FAULT PROGRAM CON‐
1037 3 X X X X X X X X
VERSION 2) The programs in the NC have been erased, a new pro‐
gram entered and neither CONV.1 nor CONV.3 softkey has
been pressed.
2038 0 FAULT AIR CONDITION Problems with air condition. X X X X X X X X
CRASH AXIS (MACRO
1039 3 An axis with torque limit disabled by maximum servo lag. X X X X X X X X
SL MAX.)
The coolant pressure is too low. The coolant has been
ADDITIONAL COOLANT switched on for more than 10 sec. and the X2.0 input has not
1040 3 X X X X
PRESSURE LOW moved to 1. Check that the SP3 pressure switch is working
properly
1041 3 X4 BELT BROKEN The X4 axis has collided and the X4 axis belt is broken X X
1041 3 Y4 BELT BROKEN Y4‐axis drive belt has been broken. X X
2041 0 Y4 BELT BROKEN Y4‐axis drive belt has been broken. X X
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /6


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
2041 0 X4 BELT BROKEN X4‐axis drive belt has been broken X X
FAULT ADDITIONAL
Coolant pressure switch indicates 1 when coolant pump is
2042 0 COOLANT PRESSURE X X X X X X
off.
SWITCH
X8.6 is at 0 for longer than 1 s. At less than one second, the
2043 1 FAULT OIL COOLER X X X X X X X X
alarm is not activated.
X1009.4 is at 0 for longer than 1 s. At less than one second,
2043 1 FAULT OIL COOLER
the alarm is not activated.
NO IN‐COLLET MACHIN‐
1044 3 Option in-collet machining not stated. X X X
ING FITTING
M831 & S1<>0 M841 & C‐axis to be locked in position but spindle rpm > 0 or electric
1045 3 X X X X X X X X
S4<>0 control is on.
1) Alarm variable speed controller
1046 3 FAULT 20 BAR-PUMP X X X X X X X X
2) Circuit breaker tripped off.
3) The 15-bar pump pressure controller inside the machine
1046 3 20-bar pump fault has not set to 1, although M45 was ordered (OPT K22.0 = 1 X X
==> M45 and X10.1 = 0.
FAULT FIRE ALARM
2047 1 Fire alarm facility defective. X X X X X X X X
FACILITY
GUIDEBUSH LUBRICA‐
2048 0 Oil level in tank at minimum.
TION OIL LOW
GUIDEBUSH LUBRICA‐ Oil level in tank at minimum.
2048 0 X X X X X X X X
TION OIL LOW Check the oil level of the ”BIJUR” group X10.3 input.
FAULT PRESSURE GUI‐ Pressure low
2049 0
DEBUSH LUBRICATION Pump motor does not run, oil circuit open. Alarm Dwell T74.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /7


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
Pressure low
FAULT PRESSURE GUI‐ Pump motor does not run, oil circuit open. Alarm Dwell T74.
2049 0 X X X X X X X X
DEBUSH LUBRICATION
Input X10.4
Pressure low
FAULT PRESSURE GUI‐
2049 1 Pump motor does not run, oil circuit open ... Alarm Dwell
DEBUSH LUBRICATION
T74xC44.
Pressure low
FAULT PRESSURE GUI‐ Pump motor does not run, oil circuit open. Alarm Dwell T74.
2049 1 X X X X X X X X
DEBUSH LUBRICATION
Input X10.4
Machine / feeder Com‐ Feeder I/O LINK defective
1050 3 X
munication fault Feeder circuit breaker triggered
2052 1 Pallet full The pallet loading system pallet is full. X X
OIL LUBRICATION AXES Oil level in the tank is at its minimum.
2053 0 X X X X X X X X
LOW Check the oil level of the “BIJUR” group X10.7 input.
Pressure low
FAULT PRESSURE AXES Pump motor does not run, oil circuit open.
2054 0 X X X X X X X X
LUBRICATION Alarm Dwell T108.
Input X11.0 for DECO 20a/26a and DECO 20/26
Pressure low
FAULT PRESSURE AXES Pump motor does not run, oil circuit open.
2054 1 X X X X X X X X
LUBRICATION Alarm Dwell T108xC56.
Input X11.0 for DECO 20a/26a and DECO 20/26
HF1 spindle faulty X0.2=1
1055 3 HF spindle fault X
HF2 spindle faulty X0.0=1
The feeder is not in the
2057 3 X X
right sequence
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /8


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
2058 2 Part sorter fault When the part sorter is retracted, the X11.4 input is not at 1 X X X
2059 1 FV1 circuit breaker fault The FV1 circuit breaker has been triggered X X X X X X X X
1060 3 BAR CHUCKED OUT SBF216 / SBF532 X X X X X X X
To optimize remnant SBF216 / SBF532
2060 0 length ==> set END-OF- X X X X X X X
BAR on
Take the remnant out
1061 3 SBF216 / SBF532 X X X X X X X
manually
Feeder axes not refer‐
1062 3 SBF216 / SBF532 X X X X X X X
enced
2081 1 Stop for remote control X11.2 is at 0 and causes a stop at the end of the part X X X X X X
Release the axes manual‐
2082 3 One or more axes are in the danger zone. X
ly
2083 0 Parts check The number of parts machined = the number of parts to be X X
counter 1 machined.
Option k29.2=1
2083 1 Parts check The number of parts machined before stoppage of the X X
counter 1 machine the number of parts to be machined before stop‐
page of the machine.
Time elapsed before stoppage of the machine = time before
stoppage of the machine. Option k29.2=1
2084 0 Parts check The number of parts machined = the number of parts to be X X
counter 2 machined.
Option k29.2=1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /9


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
2084 1 Parts check The number of parts machined before stoppage of the X X
counter 2 machine the number of parts to be machined before stop‐
page of the machine.
Time elapsed before stoppage of the machine = time before
stoppage of the machine. Option k29.2=1
The C-axis (positioning or C-axis) is ordered (C1 F44.1 or
C4 F1044.1), but the axis in movement signal (C1 F102.6
2089 2 C1- or C4-axis fault or C4 F1102.4) has not set to 1. X X
Press on RESET to cancel the alarm.

Ce message signal qu'un changement d'outil devra prochai‐
2090 0 TOOL Txx USE X X X X X X X X
nement être effectué.
The number of parts at the counter has been attained. The
2091 1 Change TOOL Txx tool has to be changed. Confirm with the [TOOL-C] soft-key X X X X X X X X
and press the RESET button.
Open multi-program
2092 0 X X X X X X X X
mode page
The maximum S1 and S4 speed for a bar ∅ is:
∅ from 26 to 28 mm: 7000 rpm
2093 1 S1 or S4 speed too high
∅ from 28 to 30 mm : 6000 rpm
∅ more than 30 mm : 5000 rpm
Select the ”EXTERNAL OFFSET” page to display the reason
RS232 external offset for the error. To acknowledge the error, stop and then restart
2095 1 X X X X X X X X
error message reception : press on the [STOP] softkey and then
on the [RUN] softkey.
The program was converted ; the user must execute [resto]
2205 1 Confirm tool offset value or [cl wrs] to restore or delete the tool offsets, respective‐ X X X X X X X X
ly.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /10


7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
1309 4 Fire alarm and ext. See D-C fire-fighting diagrams X
1310 4 D-C fire alarm See D-C fire-fighting diagrams X
2307 1 D-C valve fault alarm See D-C fire-fighting diagrams X
2308 1 D-C valve alarm stopped See D-C fire-fighting diagrams X
D-C fire-fighting alarm
2309 1 See D-C fire-fighting diagrams X
not OK
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.1 /11

7.2 MACRO ALARMS

7e 7a 13a 13a 13b 20 20a
/ / 13 226 226 / / /
10e 10a -0001 -0010 13bi 26 26a
1) Program inputting interrupted.
2) Number of programs in NC and of those entered is
3051 0 FAULT PROGRAM INPUT not identical (O9998) X X X X X X
(Malfunctioning of SRAM, of RS 232, one or more pro‐
grams deleted, etc. ...)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.2 /12

7.3 NC ALARMS
Alarm
Description
no.
7.3.1 Program Errors (P/S Alarms)
000 A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn power off.
001 TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape.
002 TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd).
This alarm will be generated only when the TV check is effective. Correct the tape.
003 Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.)
004 A numeral or the sign ”-” was input without an address at the beginning of a block.
005 The address not followed by the appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB code.
006 Sign ”-” input error. (Sign ”-” was input after an address with which it cannot be used. Or two or more ”-” signs were input.) Modify the program.
007 Decimal point ”.” input error. (A decimal point was input after an address with which it cannot be used. Or two decimal points were input.) Modify
the program.
009 Unusable character was input in significant area.
010 An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not provided is specified.
029 The offset value specified by T code is too large.
030 The offset number in T function specified for tool offset is too large.
031 In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified.
032 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by system variables, the offset amount was excessive.
046 Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return command.
059 In an external program number search, a specified program number was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being edited
in background processing. Check the program number and external signal. Or discontinue the background editing.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.1 /13

Alarm
Description
no.
060 Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number search.
066 An unallowable G code was commanded between two blocks specified by address P in G71, G72 or G73.
067 G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q was specified in MDI mode.
070 The memory area is insufficient. Delete any unnexcessary programs, then retry.
071 The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in program number search. Check the
data.
072 The number of programs to be stored exceeded 125. Delete unnecessary programs and execute program registration again.
073 The commanded program number has already been used. Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and execute program
registration again.
074 The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the program number.
078 A program number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number specified by a GOT statement was not found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background proces‐
sing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing.
079 In memory or program collation, a program in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external device.
080 In the area specified by parameter E, the measuring position reach signal does not come on. (Automatic tool compensation function).
081 Automatic tool compensation was specified without a T code. (Automatic tool compensation function).
082 T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) specified in the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function).
085 When entering data in the memory by using ASR or Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number
of bits of input data or setting of baud rate is incorrect.
086 When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off. Power supply
of I/O is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is defective.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.1 /14

Alarm
Description
no.
087 1) When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, though the read terminate command is specified, input is not inter‐
rupted after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P..B. is defective.
2) The whole program memory is used up.
Select ”EDIT”,mode and ”PROGRAMM” page and check memory used (MEMORY AREA USED)
PROGRAMM SYSTEM EDIT.
PROGRAMME USED: ???? LIB. : ????
ZONE USED: ???? LIB. : ????
090 The reference position return cannot be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too close to the reference posi‐
tion or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from the reference position, or specifiy a sufficiently fast speed for reference
position return. Check the program contents.
092 The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not return to the reference position.
098 A command of the program restart was specified without the reference position return operation after power ON and emergency stop, and G28
was found during search.
099 After completion of search in program re‐start, a move command is given with MDI. Move axis before a move command or don't interrupt MDI
operation.
100 Setting data PWE is set to 1. Turn it to 0 and reset the system.
101 The power was turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit operation. If this alarm has occurred, set PWE parameter to 1 and turn on
the CNC while pressing DELETE and [1] to set the memory to zero.
110 The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable range.
111 The calculation result of macro instruction exceeds the allowable range (-2 to 2-1 ). Modify the program.
112 Division by zero was specified (including tan 90°).
113 A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded.
114 An undefined H code is designated in G65 block. For custom macro A.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.1 /15

Alarm
Description
no.
115 A value not defined as a variable number is designated. The header contents are improper. This alarm is given in the following cases :
1) The header corresponding to the specified call machining cycle number is not found.
2) The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable range (0 - 999).
3) The number of data in the header is out of the allowable range (1 - 32767).
4) The storing start data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range (#20000 - #85535).
5) The last storing data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range (#85535).
6) The storing start data variable number of executable format data is overlapped with the variable number used in the header.
116 The variable number designated with P is forbidden for assignment.
118 The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
119 The argument of SQRT or BCD is negative.
123 Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
124 DO‐END does not correspond to 1:1.
125 For Custom Macro A. The unusable address is used in G65 block.
126 In DOn, 1=< n =< 3 is not established.
127 NC and macro commands are confused.
128 The sequence number specified in the jump command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched.
129 An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation> is used.
131 Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
132 No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.
133 Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external operator message.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.1 /16

Alarm
Description
no.
135 Without any spindle orientation, an attempt was made for spindle indexing.
140 It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program being selected in the foreground.
Select MDI mode to clear the alarm:
ROGRAM (BG‐EDIT) is selected instead of PROGRAM page.
Press Softkeys [OPRT] and [BG‐END] at the bottom of NC Screen: PROGRAM page is displayed and the program can be deleted.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHRO‐MODE
Spindle commanded in CONTOUR CONTROL mode (C‐axis) or in POSITION CONTROL or RIGID TAPPING during SYNCHRO mode.
197 The program commanded the Cf axis to move when COFF signal was ON.
210 M198 and M099 are executed in the schedule operation. M198 is executed in the DNC operation.
218 When the polygoning begins, the master spindle (P) rotation rate or the polygoning spindle (Q) rotation rate is not controlled or the control is out‐
side the limits.
220 In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis.
221 Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance cutting are executed at same time as another spindle mode (C-axis, posi‐
tioning, threading).
224 Referencing has not been performed (see also spindle POSITION CONTROL mode)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.1 /17

Alarm
Description
no.
7.3.2 Absolute Pulse Coder (APC) Alarms
300 Manual reference position return is required for axis.

301 Axis APC communication error. Failure in data transmission.
302 Axis APC overtime error. Failure in data transmission.
303 Axis APC framing error. Failure in data transmission.
304 Axis APC parity error. Failure in data transmission.
305 Axis APC pulse miss alarm. APC alarm.
306 Axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so that the data cannot be held. APC alarm.
307 Axis APC battery voltage at a level where the battery must be renewed. APC alarm.
308 Axis APC battery voltage has reached a level where the battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF). APC alarm.
350 Encoder is faulty. (See Diagnostics Nos 202 and 204 below for more details)
351 Encoder communication error. Failure in data transmission.(See Diagnostics No. 203 below for more details)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.2 /18

diagnostic No.202 diagnostic No.203

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH DTE CRC STB PRM
CSA : CHECK SUM alarm DTE : Data error.
BLA : Battery low alarm Encoder, encoder cable or CNC axis card fault.
PHA : Phase data trouble alarm CRC: CRC error
RCA : Speed count trouble alarm
Encoder, encoder cable or CNC axis card fault.
BZA : Battery zero alarm
STB : Stop bit error
CKA : Clock (time base) alarm
SPH : Soft phase data trouble alarm Encoder, encoder cable or CNC axis card fault.
PRM: Parameter error. An error in axes parameter: Alarm 417.
diagnostic No.204
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OFS MCC LDA PMS
OFS : Current conversion error in digital amplifier.
MCC: Contactor contact in amplifier has welded.
LDA : LED indicates that serial encoder is defective.
PMS: Encoder feedback pulse error caused by defective cable or
encoder.
Note : Diagnostics No. 204 #5 and #6 detail Servo Alarm No. 414.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.2 /19

Alarm
Description
no.
7.3.3 Alarmes servo
Note :
Axis or Axis No. are associated with one of Servo Alarms 400 to 417.
400 Axis overload signal comes on. (See Diagnostics No. 201 below for more details)
401 Speed check READY signal (VRDY) went off :
1) Check supplies at amplifier.
2) Cable between amplifier and NC is disconnected.
3) NC axis board is faulty.
403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT MISMATCH (Servo alarm: incompatible card/soft)
The servo card installed on the CNC and the servo software (DG-Servo) entered in the CNC are incompatible.
404 Position control READY signal (MCON) went off while position control READY signal (DRDY) is still on,
or when the power was turned on position control READY signal (DRDY) went on even though READY signal (MCON) was off.
Check if servo interface module and amplifier are properly connected.
405 Position control system fault.
A reference position return failure due to a trouble in NC or servo system.
Try again from the manual reference position return.
410 The position deviation value when the ais stops is larger than the set value.
411 The position deviation value when axis moves is larger than the set value.
413 The contents of the axis error register exceed +/-32767.
This error is usually occurs as the result of an improperly set parameter.
414 An error in the digital servo system of the axis. (See Diagnostics Nos 200 and 204 below for more details)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.3 /20

Alarm
Description
no.
415 An attempt was made to specify a speed > 511875 detection units / sec for axis.
This error is usually caused by a CMR setting failure.
416 Error in the position detection system of axis pulse coder (break alarm). (See Diagnostics No. 201 below for more details)
417 When the X‐axis is in one of the conditions listed below:
1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 is out of the specified limit for the type of motor.
2) A proper value (111 or -111) has not been set to the parameter No. 2022 for the rotating direction of the motor.
3) Illegal data (a value bleow 0, etc) was set in parameter No. 2023 (number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a vlue below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024 (number of position feedback pulses per motor revpolution).
Digital servo system alarm.
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 have not been set.
6) Parameter No. 1023 is wrong. Axes numbers are not consecutive.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.3 /21

Note :
Axis or Axis No. are associated with one of Servo Alarms 400 to 417.
Example of a servo alarm in channel 1 Example of a servo alarm in channel 2
DECO10 version 9 axes DECO10 version 9 axes

414 Servo alarm : X Axis detect.err = X1 414 Servo alarm : W Axis detect.err = X3
414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z1 414 Servo alarm : A Axis detect.err = Z3
414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y1 414 Servo alarm : B Axis detect.err = X4
414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X2 414 Servo alarm : C Axis detect.err = Z4
414 Servo alarm : V Axis detect.err = Y2 414 Servo alarm : 5 Axis detect.err = Spindle S4
414 Servo alarm : 6 Axis detect.err = Spindle S1 414 Servo alarm : 6 Axis detect.err = Spindle S3 (CNC 16i TA)
414 Servo alarm : 7 Axis detect.err = Spindle S2 414 Servo alarm : 6 Axis detect.err = Spindle S5 (CNC 16i TB)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.3 /22

DECO 13/13a version 226-0001 & 226-0010 DECO 13bi

414 Servo alarm : X Axis detect.err = X1 414 Servo alarm : X Axis detect.err = X1
414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y1 414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y1
414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X2 414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z1
414 Servo alarm : V Axis detect.err = Y2 414 Servo alarm : 4 Axis detect.err = Spindle S1
414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z1 414 Servo alarm : 5 Axis detect.err = Spindle S3
414 Servo alarm: W Axis detect err = Y4
414 Servo alarm : 7 Axis detect.err = Spindle S1
DECO 13/13a version 226-0001 & 226-0010 DECO13bi

414 Servo alarm : V Axis detect.err = X3 414 Servo alarm : X Axis detect.err = X2
414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z3 414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y2
414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X4 414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z2
414 Servo alarm : W Axis detect.err = Z4 414 Servo alarm : 4 Axis detect.err = Spindle S2
414 Servo alarm: 6 Axis detect err = Spindle S5
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.3 /23

DECO20/26 DECO20a/26a
414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y1 414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y1
414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X2 414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X2
414 Servo alarm : V Axis detect.err = Y2 414 Servo alarm : V Axis detect.err = Y2
414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z1 414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z1
414 Servo alarm: W Axis detect err = Z4 414 Servo alarm: W Axis detect err = Z4
414 Servo alarm : 7 Axis detect.err = Spindle S1 414 Servo alarm : 7 Axis detect.err = Spindle S1
DECO20/26 DECO20a/26a
414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z3 414 Servo alarm : Z Axis detect.err = Z3
414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X4 414 Servo alarm : U Axis detect.err = X4
414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Z4 414 Servo alarm : Y Axis detect.err = Y4
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.3 /24

7.3.4 Diagnostic No.201 7.3.5 Diagnostic No.200

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ALD EXP OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
If in Diagnostics No. 200 OVL=1 (Servo Alarm No. 400 is released) If in Diagnostics No. 200 OVL=1 (Servo Alarm No. 400 is released)
ALD 0: Motor overheating OVL: Overload alarm
ALD 1: Amplifier overheating LV: Low voltage in amplifier
OVC: Overcurrent inside digital amplifier
When FBAL=1 in diagnostic data No. 200 (Servo Alarm No. 416 is being gen‐ HCA: Abnormal current alarm in amplifier
erated): HVA: Overvoltage in amplifier
ALD EXP Détail de l'alarme DCA: Regenerative discharge unit circuit alarm in amplifier
Overheating 0 1 Motor overheating FBA : Disconnection alarm
alarms 1 - Amplifier overheating OFA : Overflow alarm inside digital servos
1 0 Built-in pulse coder is disconnected
Disconnection 1 1 Separately installed pulse coder is dis‐ 7.3.6 Diagnostic No.204
alarms connected #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to OFS MCC LDA PMS
software OFS : Current conversion error in digital amplifier.
MCC: Contactor contact in amplifier has welded.
LDA : LED indicates that serial encoder is defective.
PMS: Encoder signal return error caused by defective cable
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.6 /25

Alarm
Description
no.
7.3.7 Overtravel Alarms
500 Travel limit [+] in X‐axis is exceeded.

501 Travel limit [-] in X‐axis is exceeded.
502 2nd travel limit switch [+] in X‐axis is exceeded.
503 2nd travel limit switch [-] in X‐axis is exceeded.
504 3rd travel limit switch [+] in X‐axis is exceeded.
505 3rd travel limit switch [-] in X‐axis is exceeded.
7.3.8 Overheat Alarms
700 NC overheat.
- Check that fans operate normally.
- Clean air filters.
701 NC fans overheat.
704 Spindle overheat detected by spindle speed fluctuation detection.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.8 /26

Alarm
Description
no.
7.3.9 Serial Spindle Alarms
749 S‐SPINDLE LSI ERROR: Serial communication error while the system is charged after Power ON.
1) Optical cable not connected or interrupted.
2) MAIN CPU BOARD or OPTION 2 BOARD defective.
3) Spindle amplifier printed board defective. Cut off spindle amplifier supply if the alarm occurs on starting NC or if the alarm has not been
cleared.
For more details on Spindle Alarm No. 749, see Diagnostics No. 408 and 438 below.
A value in the diagnostics 401 (first spindle C1 or C2), 402 (second spindle C1 or C2), 431 (third spindle C1 or C2) indicates the defec‐
tive spindle.
DECO 7a / 10a - 7e/10e 16i TA and 16i TB:S1 No 408 channel 1 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel1)
DECO 7a / 10a - 7e/10e 16i TA and 16i TB:S2 No 408 channel 1 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel1)
DECO 7a / 10a - 7e/10e 16i TA and 16i TB:S4 No 408 channel 2 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel2)
DECO 7a / 10a 16i TA: S3 No 408 channel 2 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel2)
DECO 7a / 10a - 7e/10e 16i TB: S5 No 408 channel 2 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel2)
DECO 7a / 10a 16i TB: S3 No 438 channel 2 third spindle (if in No. 431 channel2)
DECO 13 /13a / 13a 226-0010: S1 No 408 channel 1 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel1)
DECO 13 /13a / 13a 226-0010: S2 No 408 channel 1 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel1)
DECO 13 /13a / 13a 226-0010: S3 No 438 channel 2 third spindle (if in No. 431 channel2)
DECO 13b / bi: S1 No 408 channel 1 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel1)
DECO 13b / bi: S3 No 408 channel 1 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel1)
DECO 20 - 26 / 20a - 26a: S1 No 408 channel 1 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel1)
DECO 20 - 26 / 20a - 26a: S2 No 408 channel 1 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel1)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.9 /27

7.3.10Diagnostic No.408 & 438 7.3.11 Diagnostic No.409

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE 409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
When OVL in diagnostic No. 200 equals 1 (Servo alarm No. 400 is pre‐ 7.3.12Diagnostic No.439
sent) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRE 1: CRC error ( warning ) 439 SPE S3E SHE
FRE 1: Framing error (screening, earthing error). SPE 0 Serial spindle parameters fulfil spindle amplifier operating
SNE 1: Transmission / reception data are wrong. conditions.
CER 1: Reception anomaly. SPE 1 Serial spindle parameters do not fulfil spindle amplifier oper‐
CME 1: No response in auto scanning. ating conditions.
SCA 1: Communication alarm in spindle amplifier. S3E 0 3rd spindle normal at turning on the spindles.
SSA 1: Spindle amplifier system alarm. S3E 1 3rd spindle in error at turning on the spindles.
S2E 0 2nd spindle normal at turning on the spindles.
Note : S2E 1 2nd spindle in error at turning on the spindles.
Usually these alarms are released by parasites, disconnections, supply inter‐ S1E 0 1st spindle normal at turning on the spindles.
ruptions (mini‐breaks) S1E 1 1st spindle in error at turning on the spindles.
DETAILS ON SPINDLE ALARM NO. 750 SHE 0 Serial communication module in NC normal.
See Diagnostics No. 409 and 439 below. SHE 1 Serial communication module in NC faulty.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.12 /28

Alarm
Description
no.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START FAULT
The alarm occurs when spindle amplifier is not ready for correct operation when power is on (serial spindle system).
1) Optic cable is not properly connected or spindle amplifier is off.
2) NC is on under conditions other than SU‐01 or AL‐24 for spindle amplifier. Turn spindle amplifier off and on.
3) Other cause (bad wiring).
4) 2nd spindle (when SP2 , bit 4 of Parameter 3701, is 1) is in one of the above conditions 1) to 3). (See Diagnostics No. 409 below for more
details)
A value in the diagnostics 401 (first spindle C1 or C2), 402 (second spindle C1 or C2), 431 (third spindle C1 or C2) indicates the defec‐
tive spindle.
DECO 7a / 10a 16i - 7e/10e TA and 16i TB:S1 No 409 channel 1 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel1)
DECO 7a / 10a 16i - 7e/10e TA and 16i TB:S2 No 409 channel 1 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel1)
DECO 7a / 10a 16i - 7e/10e TA and 16i TB:S4 No 409 channel 2 first spindle (if in No. 401 channel2)
DECO 7a / 10a 16i TA: S3 No 409 channel 2 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel2)
DECO 7a / 10a - 7e/10e 16i TB: S5 No 409 channel 2 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel2)
DECO 7a / 10a 16i TB: S3 No 439 channel 2 third spindle (if in No. 431 channel2)
DECO 13b / bi: S3 No 409 channel 1 second spindle (if in No. 402 channel1)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.12 /29

Alarm
Description
no.
751 FIRST SPINDLE ALARM DETECTION (AL-XX).
The alarm indicates presence of an alarm on spindle amplifier.
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT.
The alarm is caused by :
- incorrect execution of mode change: CS CONTOURING, SPINDLE POSITIONING, RIGID TAPPING and SPINDLE CONTROL modes.
- spindle amplifier not responding correctly to mode change commanded by NC.
754 SPINDLE-1 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM
761 SECOND SPINDLE ALARM. (AL-XX). See Alarm 751.
762 SECOND SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT. See Alarm 752.
771 SPINDLE - 3 ALARM. (AL-XX). (S6 Channel 1 or S3 Channel 2).
This alarm indicates presence of an alarm on spindle amplifier. (For description of spindle amplifier alarms see Chapter 9 of these Instructions)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.12 /30

Alarm
Description
no.
772 SPINDLE - 3 MODE CHANGE FAULT. Alarm from 3rd spindle (S6 Channel 1 or S3 Channel 2).
Mode change incorrectly executed.
CS contouring, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, spindle control mode.
Alarm is activated when spindle amplifier does not respond correctly to mode change commanded by CNC.
774 SPINDLE - 3 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM. Abnormal load on motor. Clear with RESET.
900 ROM parity error (cnc/comm/servo) Replace ROM.
910 SRAM PARITY: (4N). Parity error in tape drive.
- Clear memory or replace RAM module.
- Reset DATA and all parameters.
911 SRAM PARITY: (4N +1). Parity error in tape drive.
- Clear memory or replace RAM module.
- Reset DATA and all parameters.
912 DRAM PARITY (BYTE 0): RAM parity error in DRAM module.
- Replace DRAM module..
- Replace DRAM module.
Erase the memory by pressing the ”DELETE” and ”1” keys when the NC is switched on (the programme and the offsets are erased) or replace
the DRAM module.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.12 /31

Alarm
Description
no.
Erase the memory by pressing the ”DELETE” and ”1” keys when the NC is switched on (the programme and the offsets are erased) or replace
the DRAM module.
920 SERVO ALARME (1/2/3/4 AXIS). Watch-dog alarm or parity error in servo module (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th axis).
Replace servo module or MAIN CPU BOARD (control board of the axis concerned).
922 SERVO ALARME (5/6/7/8 AXIS). Watch-dog alarm or parity error in servo module (5th, 6th, 7th, or 8th axis.
Replace servo module or MAIN CPU BOARD (control board of the axis concerned)
924 Digital servo module is not installed.
Check if servo control modules our servo interface modules on MAIN CPU BOARD or on OPTION 2 BOARDS are properly mounted.
926 SERVO ALARME (1/2/3/4/5/6 AXIS). Watch-dog alarm or parity error in servo module (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th axis).
Replace servo module of the axis concerned.
930 CPU error (abnormal interrupt): MAIN CPU BOARD is faulty.
945 Communication error in serial spindles: Optic cable can be cut off.
950 PMC error: PMC module on MAIN BOARD is faulty.
951 PMC‐RC error. (Watch-dog alarm)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.12 /32

Alarm
Description
no.
970 Parity or NMI error in PMC‐RB or PMC‐RA2 module: MAIN BOARD is faulty.
971 SLC communication error in PMC‐RB , PMC‐RA1, or PMC‐RA2.
Check if PMC module on MAIN BOARD is correctly connected to I/O unit (I/O Link).
972 NMI on a board other than MAIN CPU BOARD: OPTION 1/2/3 CARD can be faulty.
973 NMI, cause unknown.
974 FANUC BUS error : MAIN CPU or OPTION 1/2/3 BOARD may be faulty.
975 MAIN CPU BOARD BUS error / faulty.
976 Local BUS error. MAIN CPU BOARD BUS faulty.
7.3.13Alarmes spécifiques à PNC DECO
218 Command is missing or out of range at the start of polygoning for Master Spindle Ratio P or Polygoning Spindle Ratio Q.
5018 Master spindle speed or polygoning synchro exceeds limit value. Or because the speed is too low the commanded speed ratio cannot be main‐
tained.
5900 Axis servo program error:
Program not converted (see Diagnostics Nos 900 and 901).
Program Diagnostics No. 900 in conversion alarm.
Sequence Diagnostics No. 901 in conversion alarm.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.13 /33

Alarm
Description
no.
5901 Spindle program error:
5902 DO signal program error:
5903 Threading program error:
5904 TOOL OFFSET DATA program error:
5905 Storage capacity insufficient for axis / spindle / threading tables after conversion: (see Diagnostics Nos 900 and 901).
5906 Storage capacity insufficient for DO signal tables after conversion: (see Diagnostics Nos 900 and 901).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.13 /34

Alarm
Description
no.
5907 Loop program error:
5910 TOOL OFFSET limit set by Parameter 7431 has been exceeded.
5911 Data table is read while spindle position / speed command is released
(POSITION CONTROL mode is active when a spindle speed is commanded in SPEED CONTROL mode).
5912 Spindle speed synchro not set up.
5913 Spindle phase synchro not set up.
5914 Signal absent in polygoning for spindle speed attained.
5915 DO command with same ITP (duration) > 5. Hence, unfinished DO command > 16.
5916 DO addresses exceed limits.
Y0000 to Y0127 (I/O Link) Y1000 to Y1014 (I/O Card)
F0160 to F0255 and F1160 to F1255
5920 No threading subroutine commanded by main program.
5921 Spindle ON not commanded. Or spindle speed = < 0 commanded.
5922 Threading feedrate too high. Or spindle speed too high.
(A spindle or axis encoder pulse detection problem can also trigger this alarm)
5923 THREADING DOES NOT END. Threading is not finished.
Threading is not finished whereas the following threading has been commanded.
Threading is not finished whereas the programming cycle is carried out.
No threading has been carried out (Spindle encoder pulse has not been found).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.13 /35

Alarm
Description
no.
5925 Axis positioning error in check point (ITP) has been established by Check Bit # 3.
Example: N100 P1000 Q 00001000 ... > Parameter 7460 value.
See Diagnostics No. 905 and 906 below for more details on the axis which released alarm.
- Press the SYSTEM hardkey on NC Keyboard,
- Press the [SYSTEM] and [DGNOS] softkeys.
- Press the PAGE UP/DOWN keys to display Diagnostics 905 and 906.
5930 No program selected.
5931 Program selected is not available. This alarm appears:
1) If during the time of RESET the program has not had time to re-spool.
2) If when selecting program INIT (O01), by pressing RESET key or by selecting AUTO mode, the signal CYCLE START (R102.3) is at 1.
5935 Parameter 7450 is illegal.
In AXIS RETRACT function (axis return in position after manual operation), the same order to return has been specified for one or more axes.
5940 While a spindle is in synchro, a synchro of another spindle has been commanded.
5941 In spindle synchro, the slave spindle is identical with the master spindle.
Or a spindle other than 1, 2, 3 and 4 has been commanded as slave.
5942 The master spindle is not in SPEED CONTROL mode.
Spindle synchro cannot be commanded in POSITION CONTROL mode or CONTOUR CONTROL mode.
5943 The slave spindle is not in SPEED CONTROL mode.
Spindle synchro cannot be commanded in POSITION CONTROL mode or CONTOUR CONTROL mode.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.3.13 /36

7.4 DIAGNOSTIC 905 / 906 (CHECK COORDINATE) BY TYPE OF MACHINE
7.4.1 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e 7.4.3 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 13b / bi

Y2 X2 Y1 Z1 X1 Z1 Y1 X1
905 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 905 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z4 X4 Z3 X3 Z2 Y2 X2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7.4.2 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010 7.4.4 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 20/26
Y4 Z1 Y2 X2 Y1 X1 Z4 Z1 Y2 X2 Y1 X1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z4 X4 Z3 X3 Y4 X4 Z3 X3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7.4.5 DIAGNOSTIC DECO 20a/26a

Z4 Z1 Y2 X2 Y1 X1
905 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y4 X4 Z3 X3
906 A28 A27 A26 A25 A24 A23 A22 A21
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.4.5 /37

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 7.4.5 /38

8. BASIC OPERATION
8.1 DOWNLOAD A PROGRAM INTO CNC OVER RS‐232

Purpose: Download a program into CNC memory from a PC
Before you start: No NC alarm.
Compatible peripherals (cable, baudrate, protocol)
Cable connected-socket (see chapter on ”Layout of interfaces on machines”).
Delete the existing program before downloading a new one into CNC.
8.1.1 Delete a program
2 Select Channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector.
Select EDIT mode with Mode Selector.
O-9999 and
then type O-9999 over the keyboard. Press to DELETE.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.1.1 /1

8.1.2 Download a Program into CNC

Before you start: The previous program must have been erased.
”PROG”
(OPRT) Press this sequence of softkeys :

When EXEC is pressed, ”LSK” flashes at the bottom right of
the screen. When PC transfers part program the flashing Note:
(READ) LSK is replaced with INPUT message. Always convert a program, downloaded into NC over RS
232, to make it operational.
When transfer is completed and no alarm is displayed,
(EXEC)
INPUT disappears from screen.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.1.2 /2

8.1.3 Obligatory Program Conversion
Press as many times as necessary PROG key of NC until program page appears. PROGRAM is displayed at the top of
the screen.
(CONV. 1) Convert all.

Press this softkey at the bottom of the screen if the program downloaded is new.
or
(CONV. 2)
Convert All except DOs and OFFSETS (Not for use.)
or
(CONV. 3) Convert All except ”OFFSETS”
Press this softkey at the bottom of the screen : if the program entered is a modified version of an existing program, and if
no correctors have been either modified or added.
⊗ Interdiction : If you pressed one of the [CONV.1], [CONV.2] or [CONV.3] keys to convert a program and CONVERT flashes at the bottom of the screen,
neither change the mode on the control panel of the machine nor press to ”RESET”.
. Attention !- If you selected the EDIT or AUTO mode, stay in it until CONVERT at the bottom of the screen stops flashing.
- If CONVERT at the bottom of the screen keeps flashing, stand by until it stops flashing and then press to ”RESET”.
A mode change or resetting with ”RESET”interrupts the program conversion and the ensuing incomplete execution of the program results in poor
operation of the machine: spindles do not want to go, axes refuse to get referenced, etc.
- If you interrupt the program conversion, press the [CONV.1] or [CONV.3] keys to recommence the operation.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.1.3 /3

8.1.4 Display programms

Purpose: Display a program list from the NC storage.
Before you start: Interrupt the program.
Press once or more times PROG key of NC until stored pro‐

grams appear.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.1.4 /4

8.2 DOWNLOAD A PROGRAM WITH MEMORY CARD

Purpose: To input a part programme
Before you start: No NC alarm
Preparatory steps on PC:
1. Open program: DNC-DECO V5
2. Click menu: PORT/FLASH
3. Click menu: SETUP
4. Check off: ON FILE
5. Click: CHANGE
6. Select drive.
7. Click OK
8.2.1 Preparatory steps on the machine
”RESET”
Set Mode Selector on MDI
”OFFSET SETTING” Press once / twice to open the SETTING page.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.2.1 /5

Move cursor to: I/O CHANNEL
4 Enter : 4 (MEMORY CARD)
”INPUT”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.2.1 /6

8.2.2 Download a program with memory card

First Regenerate All (subroutine, TB‐DECO)
load a program on the MEMORY CARD.
Insert the MEMORY CARD in the machine.
”RESET”
2 Quit Channel 2
Set Mode Selector on EDIT.
”PROG”
O-9999 Tip in O-9999 (upper case O and not zero: 0).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.2.2 /7

”DELETE”
”PROG”
(RIGHT PAGE)
(CARD) (CARD)
(OPRT) (OPRT)
(F READ) (F READ)
Select the program number
(F SET) (F SET)
(EXEC) (EXEC) ”INPUT” flashes

Note: Stand by until flashing stops.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.2.2 /8

8.2.3 Convert a program
”PROG”
(CONV 1) To convert all
(CONV 3) To convert all except offsets
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.2.3 /9

8.3 EDIT TOLL GEOMETRY AND WEAR
Offset data: Correction units :

Press as many times as necessary ”OFFSET SETTING” - for METRIC machine: 1 μm
key until (OFFSET) appears at the top of the screen. - for INCH machines: 0.00004″
- Axis OFFSET max.: 1999 on diameter
999 on radius
(OFFSET) Note:
For DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e (without X3-Z3)
Axes by diameter X1-X2-X3-X4
Axes by radius Z1-Y1-Y2-Z3-Z4
For DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
Axes by radius Z1-Y1-Y2-Z3-Z4-Y4
(OFFSET)
For DECO 13/13a 226-0001, 226-0010
Axes by radius Y1-Y2-Z1-Y4-Z3-Z4
For DECO 13b/bi
Axes by diameter X1-X2
Axes by radius Y1-Z1-Y2-Z2
Select the following page.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.3 /10

OFFSET 05 AXIS Z1 METRIC (INCH) PAGE 1 OFFSET 05 AXIS Z1 METRIC PAGE 4

NO WEAR SHOULDER NO WEAR SHOULDER
01 W010 0 W011 0 31 W950 0 W975 0
02 W110 12 W111 0 32 W976 0
03 W120 -13 W121 0
04 W160 14 W161 0
05 W210 0 W211 0
06 W220 15 W221 0
07 W950 0 W951 0
08 W952 0 FIXATION 0
09 W953 0 FIXATION SPEED 2000
10 W954 0
>_ >_
(AXISRH) ( INPUT ) ( INPUT+ ) ( +1 ) ( -1 ) (AXISRH) ( INPUT ) ( INPUT+ ) ( +1 ) ( -1 )
New version without SHOULDERS

Note:
From CEXEC version CMOV3-01 onwards, SHOULDERS are no OFFSET 05 AXIS Z1 METRIC PAGE 4
longer available. NO WEAR
31 W950 0
32
FIXATION 0
FIXATION SPEED 2000
>_
Version : CMOV3 - 01 ME 27.11.2002
(AXISRH) ( INPUT ) ( INPUT+ ) ( +1 ) ( -1 )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.3 /11

New version CMOV4-00 >>>

OFFSET 05 AXIS Z1 METRIC (INCH) PAGE 1
NO TOOL WEAR ∅
02 T11 12
03 T12 -13
04 T16 14
05 T21 0
06 T22 15
>_
(AXISRH) ( INPUT ) ( INPUT+ ) ( +1 ) ( -1 )
Note:
Starting with the C-EXEC version CMOV4-00, only the tools
actually used for the part program are displayed. Thus the
number of available pages is variable.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.3 /12

8.3.1 Keys To Edit Tool Geometry & Wear (AXISRH) Selects another OFFSET Table :
e.g. - Type Y2 over the keyboard.
Note:
- Then press this softkey.
On machines in INCH the entered value is rounded
to the next 0,001 mm down. Inputs the value typed in on the keyboard
( INPUT )
PAGE down. Its assignment depends on machine into the selected OFFSET.
mode.
PAGE (INPUT+) Inputs the value, typed over the keyboard,
for OFFSET selected.
PAGE up. Its assignment depends on machine
PAGE
mode. ( +1 ) Increments OFFSET selected by 1 μm for
METRIC machines
Cursor up or down to select an OFFSET. Increments OFFSET selected by 0.00004″
for INCH machines
Cursor left or right to select an OFFSET / WEAR / ( -1 ) Decrements OFFSET selected by 1 μm for
SHOULDER type. METRIC machine.
Decrements OFFSET selected by
0.00004″ for INCH machines.
CANCEL characters entered over NC Keyboard
CAN
Selects the page allowing to restore the
OFFSETS (See Restoration of OFFSETS)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.3.1 /13

8.3.2 Restore Offsets

Each time an OFFSET (WEAR) is edited, the OFFSETS of all axes are registered in a file (always the same one). The file allows for later reinsertion of
these OFFSETS, e.g. after a CONV 1. The restoration follows according to the WEAR No (not Corrector No).
The RESTORE OFFSETS function is particularly useful when a CONV 1 is necessary (adding a tool). With this function you can retrieve OFFSETS of the
other tools. Proceed as follows:
(CONV. 1) After loading the tables.
”OFFSET SETTING”
Press...
This function can also retrieve an operation error, e.g. an
+ and erroneous stroke on the [CONV. 1] key.
(RESTO) The OFFSETS are then retrieved.
Δ Caution !
After a CONV 1, no value must be entered in OFFSET pages, otherwise the CNC OFFSET back-up file will be irretrieva‐
bly lost. It is overwritten with each value entered.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.3.2 /14

The page looks as follows:

Note:
If you clear (reset) all offsets with the [CL WRS] key and did not input
any data into the OFFSETS, you can restore OFFSETS by pressing
the [RESTO] key.
The [CONV.3] key is no longer necessary.
When you press the [RESTO] key after a [CONV.1], you will re-estab‐
lish the OFFSETS.
>_
(RESTO) (CL WRS) ( ) ( ) ( )
Description of the softkeys:
(RESTO) Press to restore OFFSETS of all axes.
(CL WRS) Press to clear (reset) OFFSETS of all

axes.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.3.2 /15

8.4 PART INFO PAGE

Purpose: This page gives information concerning the part; the program name, part time, part length, bar diameter, stock, etc.
This page also controls the number of NC programs against the number of programs downloaded.
Unless these numbers are identical, Alarm 3051: FAULT PROGRAM ENTRY appears.
OR ”POS” or ”CUSTOM GRAPH”
Press twice (RIGHT PAGE) to open this page:
(INFO) (INFO)
(DOWN) (DOWN)
OR
(UP) (UP) to select an appropriate page
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.4 /16

PART INFORMATION PAGE (continued)

Page 1 Page 2
MODE - AUTO O0002 N01365 MODE - AUTO O0002 N01365
** PARTNAME= TEST PAGE INFO PIECE ** PARTNAME= TEST PAGE INFO PIECE
PROGNUMBER= 60 PRG CN= 60 PROGNUMBER= 60 PRG CN= 60
PARTID= EX-V4-09 PARTDIAMETER=8.00
PARTIME= 8952 (MS) MATERIAL= ETG 100
PARTLENGTH= 100.00 MET= DECO10
FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100% FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100%
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1 MEM **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1
( UP ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( DOWN ) ( UP ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( DOWN )
Page 3
MODE - AUTO O0002 N01365
** PARTNAME= TEST PAGE INFO PIECE
PROGNUMBER= 60 PRG CN= 60
BDNAME= V4-09 ROB.DBM
DRAWNO= E V4-09
CREATEDDATE= 23.02.1999
FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100%
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1

( UP ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( DOWN )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.4 /17

8.5 PART PROGRAM LOADING

Goal: Simplify the part program loading procedure in the DECO machines by grouping together the following
commands:
1. Deletion of all the programs in the CNC memory (O-9999)
2. Loading of the new program from the serial port, Memory-card or Ethernet.
3. Conversion of the program into tables (convert 1)
4. Restoration of all tool wear values (restore)
This procedure will be launched by a single key, after selecting the file to be loaded in the event of downloading from
the Memory-card or Ethernet port. For these two transfer methods (Memory Card and Ethernet) it is also possible to enter the
program name to be downloaded in letters.
Limitations: -The 4 above commands will be systematically run
-Only TB-DECO part programs will be able to be loaded
-The control screen 1 is only accessible in EDIT mode in channel 1
-After loading the program, the command CONV.1 is run
(conversion of all the tables, including DO and tool offset)
-The command CONV.2 (conversion of only axis and spindle tables)
is no longer available
-For loading from the Ethernet port, the link must be previously configured
from the CNC Fanuc pages
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5 /18

8.5.1 Operations
Goal: Access the control screen
Referen‐ Key to press

Description of actions
ce
”RESET”
2 Selection of channel 1:
Selection of ”EDIT” mode
”PROG”
softkey ”pgm load”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.1 /19

8.5.2 Configuration parameter setting

Goal: select the port used to load the TB-Deco part program (Memory-card, RS232 No1 serial port, No 2 serial port or Ethernet port)
and define the parameters of the serial link.
Starting condition access the program loading control screen (see 7.5.1)
Note:Only serial port No. 1 is standard on all numerical controls; the Memory-
card reader, serial port No 2 and Ethernet link are options.
The maximum baud rate on the serial ports may vary based on the type of nu‐
merical control..
The Ethernet link parameters are defined in the CNC Fanuc pages.
(see 14.11)

ce
SETTIN press the SETTING softkey (it is possi‐

G ble to modify the setup)
select the field to modify used to return to the main page without saving
QUIT the changes.
used to save the changes and then return to
SAVE the main page.
use the ALTER key to scroll the authori‐
sed values Baud rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 baud
Number of data bits: 7 or 8 bits
Number of stop bits: 1 or 2 bits
press the softkey SAVE to save the
SAVE Parity test: ”NONE” , ”ODD” or ”EVEN”
changes
Protocol: ”NONE”, ”HARDWARE” or ”XON/XOFF”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.2 /20

8.5.3 Loading from the Memory-card Referen‐ Key to press

ce
Starting condition: no NC alarm
program loading control screen used to select the page where the name
selected (see 7.5.1) of the file to be downloaded appears, if
Memory-card port selected (see 7.5.2) necessary.
Memory-card inserted
select the file to download
START press the softkey START
RESET used to interrupt program loading

The first 99 files with.TRF extension are searched for on the Memory-card
and the first 6 file names are displayed as well as the font size, date and time
of the change.
used to redisplay the list of files available on the Memory-
DIR card and reset the errors which occurred during downloa‐
ding.
The most recent file is automatically selected if its name is displayed on the
current page.
The names of the files are displayed in DOS format, with a maximum of 8 char‐
acters. Names longer than 8 characters are shortened: ~1, ~2.
this key pressed before softkey DIR is used to search the
*
first 99 files without taking into account the extension.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.3 /21

It is possible to directly write the program name to be downloaded instead of >>>

selecting it from the list. To do this, enter the program name without the .TRF
extension using the keyboard.
Confirm by pressing the « INPUT » key.
The file name appears opposite: FILE BY NAME =>

With the .TRF extension.
Select the entered file name with the DOWN key.
Press until the file name opposite FILE BY NAME is

selected.
START Press the START softkey to start downloading.
Press UP to cancel the FILE BY NAME selection.
The FILE BY NAME program name is memorised when the machine is shut
off.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.3 /22

8.5.4 Loading from a serial port RESET used to interrupt program loading
Starting condition: no NC alarm used to interrupt loading of the program and reset the errors
CAN which occurred during downloading.
program loading control screen
selected (see 7.5.1)
SETTING used to access the serial port settings
RS232 port selected and configured (7.5.2)
compatible peripheral (cable, baud rate,
protocol) cable connected First the CNC goes into standby for a first ”%” character which must appear
at the beginning of the part program file. This standby has no time limitation.
Refe‐ Key to press Program loading starts as soon as the first ”%” character is received.
rence Program loading is interrupted if no character is received for a second or if a
second ”%” character appears in the last 5 characters received.
press the softkey START: the programs
are deleted, the CNC goes to LSK recei‐ A first ”%” character must appear at the beginning of the file and a second
START must be found among the last 5 characters of the file: do not put ”tape leader”
ving flashing on the bottom right of the
screen. The number of characters received is displayed during downloading.
- Then launch downloading from the PC.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.4 /23

8.5.5 Loading from an Ethernet port Referen‐ Key to press

ce
Starting condition: no NC alarm
program loading control screen used to select the page where the name
selected (see 7.5.1) of the file to be downloaded appears, if
Ethernet port selected (see 7.5.2) necessary.
Ethernet port configured, connection selec
ted (see 14.11)
FTP server available on the PC
select the file to download
START press the softkey START
RESET used to interrupt program loading

used to redisplay the list of files available on the Ethernet
DIR port and reset the errors which occurred during downloa‐
ding.
The first 96 files with .TRF extension with a name under 60 characters are
searched in the Ethernet port directory and the first 6 file names are displayed.
Only the first 37 characters of the name are visible. If the Ethernet port only
contains one .TRF file, it is automatically selected.
this key pressed before softkey DIR is used to search the
first 96 files without taking into account the extension and
* the length of the name. Only files with a name not excee‐
ding 63 characters (including the extension), can be down‐
loaded.
Note: An ”FTP server” session must be previously opened on the PC
(or server) where the .TRF files are located. The ”FTP server' software can
be supplied by Tornos or a local company specialised in linking machines
up to a network.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.5 /24

It is possible to directly write the program name to be downloaded instead of >>>

selecting it from the list. To do this, enter the program name without the .TRF
extension using the keyboard.
Confirm by pressing the « INPUT » key.
The file name appears opposite: FILE BY NAME =>

With the .TRF extension.
Select the entered file name with the DOWN key.
Press until the file name opposite FILE BY NAME is

selected.
START Press the START softkey to start downloading.
Press UP to cancel the FILE BY NAME selection.
The FILE BY NAME program name is memorised when the machine is shut
off.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.5 /25

8.5.6 General messages
CAN DIR press one of the softkeys to reset an error message
Name Possible causes
Delete error : NC-Memory protected - The CNC part program memory is protected: the programs in the memory cannot be displayed.
Delete error : command rejected - The CNC is not in ”reset” .
- A P/S type CNC error prevents displaying of the programs in the memory.
Load error : incorrect program data - The contents of the *.TRF file are incorrect: the last three lines of the file must contain: 9999, M99, %.
- The *.TRF file was not correctly copied on the memory-card.
- The *.TRF file contains lower case characters: the data entered in TB-Deco under ”part information” must be
upper case.
Load error : NC-Memory protected - The CNC part program memory is protected: the *.TRF file could not be loaded in the memory.
Load error : NC-Memory full - The CNC part program memory is insufficient and the *.TRF file was not completely loaded.
Load error : command rejected - The CNC is not in ”reset” .

- The ”background” editor is enabled.
- A CNC alarm is blocking the entry of new programs.
Convert.1 error - Table converting has been interrupted by a ”reset” or ”emergency stop”.
- An error occurred while converting the tables and a CNC alarm has been generated.
Restore error : no file OffAxe.wrs - There is no ”OffAxe.wrs” CNC file containing backup of tool wear values: unable to restore it.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.6 /26

Read error on file XXX - System error while reading file XXX
- The contents of the ”OffAxe.wrs” CNC file containing backup of tool wear values is incorrect: it was restored up
until the error occurred.
- The ”OffAxe.wrs” file was generated with a version prior to C-exec and the number of saved axes is incorrect:
it was restored up until the first inexistent axis.
Malloc rejected - System error: the memory required to run this function is not allocated by the CNC
Program load aborted - The program load procedure has been interrupted by a CNC alarm or ”reset”.
LOADING COMPLETE - The loading procedure has been normally completed: the new program has been loaded and converted, the
tool wear values have been restored
8.5.7 Messages for Memory-Card
Please insert Memory-Card - No memory-card detected: insert the memory-card and press the softkey [ DIR ].
Memory-Card error: low battery voltage - The database backup battery of the memory-card is flat and needs to be replaced.
Memory-Card error: already in use - The memory-card is being used by the system.
- The softkey [ DIR ] was pressed immediately after insertion of a memory-card: the system monitors the memo‐
ry-card every 1-2 seconds and did not have time to detect the loading. Wait 2 seconds before pressing the soft‐
key [ DIR ] again.
Memory-Card error code XXX - Access to the memory-card has generated system error number XXX.
- The format of the memory-card cannot be read.
- The memory-card is being used by the system.
No Memory-Card inserted - The memory-card was taken out before program downloading finished.
M-Card : file XXX not found - File XXX is not available on the currently inserted memory-card.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.7 /27

8.5.8 RS232 Messages
Serial port open error XXX - Error number XXX occurred when serial port RS232 was opened.
- The CNC ”serial port 1 or 2” was not declared.
- The parameters of the serial port do not match.
- The serial port is being used by the system.
- The ”external offset” function uses this serial port.
- The ”faptladder online” function uses this serial port. check if [ PMC ] [ MONIT ] [ ONLINE ] RS 232 C = NOT
USED.
Serial port close error XXX - Error number XXX occurred when serial port RS232 was closed.
- The serial port was closed by another application.
Serial port status error XXX - Error XXX occurred while receiving data: parity error, baud rate or data length incorrect.
- Receiving buffer overflow: protocol or RS232 link cable incorrect.
Load error : end char % not found - The character % does not appear among the 5 final characters of the *.TRF file.
- If a character is not received for more than a second the system will terminate downloading.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.8 /28

8.5.9 Ethernet Messages.
Ethernet : command rejected - The ”background” editor is enabled.

- A P/S type CNC alarm is blocking the entry of new programs.
Ethernet : data server busy - FTP command being run.

- The Ethernet port is being used by the system.
Ethernet : no local descriptor table - System error
Ethernet : wrong file name - The selected file is no longer available in the directory made available by the FTP server.
- The name of the selected file has more than 63 characters.
Ethernet : option not available - The CNC ”Ethernet board” was not declared.
- Soft CNC version or C-exec library incorrect.
- The I/O CHANNEL setting is not equal to ”5” on the CNC 16iTA
- The I/O CHANNEL setting is not equal to ”9” on the CNC 16iTB
Ethernet : NC-Memory full - The CNC part program memory is insufficient and the *.TRF file was not completely loaded.
Ethernet : wrong function code - System error
- Soft CNC version or C-exec library incorrect.
Ethernet : data server error XXX - FTP function system error: error number XXX
Ethernet : function error XXX - Ethernet function system error: error number XXX
Ethernet directory empty - The directory made available by the FTP server is empty and does not contain any files or sub-directories.
Ethernet directory : no file *.TRF - The directory made available by the FTP server does not contain any files with TRF extension.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.9 /29

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 8.5.9 /30

9. MANUAL OPERATION OF MACHINE FUNCTIONS
9.1 REFERENCE AN AXIS

Note: Axis reference pickoff is not permitted with the doors open.
To start with: Turn Main Switch ON.
Turn NC on.
Turn power on.
Select AXIS‐BY‐AXIS REFERENCE mode.
DECO 7a/10a: X1-Z1-Y1-X2-Y2-X3-Z3-X4-Z4

Select the required axis with Axis / Channel Selector. DECO 7e/10e: X1-Z1-Y1-X2-Y2-X4-Z4
- Open main spindle collet if Z1‐axis is selected for refer‐ DECO 13/13a/20a/26a:
encing. X1-Z1-Y1-X2-Y2-X3-Z3-X4-Z4-Y4
- Open pickoff‐spindle collet if Z4‐axis is selected for refer‐ DECO 13b/13bi: X1-Y1-Z1-X2-Y2-Z2
encing.
Note :
- Open pickoff‐spindle collet if Z2‐axis, for DECO 13b/bi, is Before opening the collet make sure that the barfeeder
selected for referencing. thrust is turned off or that the tube counter weight is blocked
whichever may by the case for your machine.
The axis selected is being referenced.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.1 /1

9.2 AUTO REFERENCE ALL AXES

Note: Axis reference pickoff is not permitted with the doors open.
The axes are referenced automatically in the following order:
DECO13a 226-0010/13/13a: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z4 - Z3 - X3 - X4 - Y4
DECO 13b/13bi: X1 - Y1 - Z2 - X2 - Y2 - Z1
DECO7a/10a: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z3 - Z4 - X3 - X4
DECO7e/10e: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z4 - X4
DECO20/26/20a/26a: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z3 - Z4 - X3 - X4 - Y4
Reference one axis after another if the automatic referencing order might cause collisions because of the tools used.
To start with: Turn Main Switch ON.
Turn NC on.
Turn power on.
Select AUTOMATIC REFERENCE mode (for all axes)
Open main spindle collet.

Open pickoff‐spindle collet.
Note:
If the machine is fitted with a mechanical pipe, before opening the collet,
you must make sure the counterweight is blocked.
“START CYCLE”
The axes are being referenced.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.2 /2

9.3 OVERRIDE, STOP & RESTART AXES

Object: Stop and restart axes.
Note: The feed speed potentiometer for the axes must be set to the ”0” position.
To SLOW DOWN & STOP axes:...
...hold down Minus[-] Axis Feedrate Override Button until Note :

the axes stop. Program execution is also interrupted.
To RESTART & SPEED UP axes:...
...hold down Plus[+] Axis Feedrate Override Button.

The rate grows until the button is released or it reaches *100% for DECO 13a-226-0010/13/13a/13b/13bi
100% or 120% of the programmed rate. *120% for DECO 7a/10a/7e/10e/20/26/20a/26a
Or press both plus[+] and minus[-] buttons together to put Note :
axis feedrate override at 100%. Program execution is also resumed.
OR (see also chapter “User interface”)
Note :
“STOP CYCLE”: the axes stop.
Program execution is also resumed.
Note :
“START CYCLE”: the axes restart.
Program execution is also resumed.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.3 /3

9.4 JOG AXES
Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.
Select the axis required.
Press plus[+] or minus[-] buttons as necessary to move the axis selected in the required direction.
Press Axis Feedrate Override Plus[+] or Minus[-] Buttons (as necessary) to jog axes faster or slower from 0 to 100%.
(see also chapter “User interface”)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.4 /4

9.5 OPEN / CLOSE COLLET

To start with: The pushbuttons will function only when program is not in cycle.
Collets will close automatically when the program is resumed with CYCLE START.
The program will continue to open / close collets.
Collets can be opened / closed manually at the END‐OF‐TABLE.
9.5.1 Display Main & Pickoff Spindle Status - Obtain No‐Pressure Status
OR “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH” or “CUSTOM”
Press twice(PAGE A DROITE), then press softkey (COLLET).
A “RESET” will restore the open / closed collet status.
Note: For DECO 13 / 13a 226-0001 & 226-0010 & 13b.

The figure 307001 embossed on the shaft of the main or pickoff spindle
indicates the presence of two air valves controlling opening and closing
of the respective collets.
No‐Pressure status can obtained if you press together both OPEN &
CLOSE SPINDLE keys. This can be useful e.g. for changing the collet
MAIN SPINDLE COLLET - CLOSED sleeve.
PICKOFF SPINDLE COLLET - OPEN
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.5.1 /5

9.5.2 Putting the collets into “no pressure” state

Application for DECO 13 / 13a 226-0001 & 226-0010 & 13b & DECO 26/26a in counter-spindle.
+ Press to respectively open / close main spindle collet to obtain No-Pressure Status.
+ Press to respectively open / close pickoff-spindle collet to obtain No-Pressure Status.
Press one of the two to cancel the No‐Pressure Status.
9.5.3 Coolant Monitoring OFF

If you set a weak flowrate the monitoring will give Alarm 1016: COOLANT PRESSURE MINIMAL VALUE. If however you want to work at this weak flow‐
rate you can disable the monitoring in the following way:
Press twice (RIGHT PAGE)
(PARAM) (PARAM)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.5.3 /6

The following screen is displayed: Description of the softkeys
Location Key Notes
[CM ON] Press this softkey to enable coolant

monitoring.
MODE - MDI O0001 N00000
[CM OFF] Press this softkey to disable coolant
MACHINE PARAMETERS monitoring.
MACHINE NO 61757 [MANOFF] Press this softkey to disable manipula‐

tor.This key is operational in the INIT
COOLANT MONITORING OFF program with CYCLE STOP.
M894 FUNCTION ON A reset reenables Manipulator Function,
MANIPULATOR FUNCTION ON i.e. cancels MANOFF.
M894OF Press this softkey to disable M894

FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100% (Deep Drilling Function)This key is oper‐
S 0 T0000 ational in the INIT program with CYCLE
MDI **** *** *** 16 : 32 : 08 CHAN 1 STOP.
[ CM ON ] [ CM OFF ] [ M894OF ] [ MANOFF ] [ M45OFF ] A reset reenables Deep Drilling Func‐
tions, i.e. cancels M894OF.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.5.3 /7

9.6 ORIENT S1‐SPINDLE FOR PROFILED PART PICKOFF
Note :
The S1‐spindle must be offset only when a part is picked off by S4‐pickoff‐spindle with a profiled collet, e.g. square.
- Enter G601 over NC Keyboard in Channel 1 (MDI) to cancel the earlier spindle offset angle before you establish a new one.
9.6.1 Cancelling the old offset
Location To press key Description OF actions
2 Select channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector.
Select MDI mode with Mode Selector.
Select PROGRAM page (MDI) on NC Keyboard.
Enter over NC Keyboard : G601 (see table)

+
Press successively these 3 keys.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.1 /8

9.6.2 Orient S4‐Pickoff‐Spindle at 0°
Select PROGRAM page (MDI) on NC Keyboard.
Enter over NC Keyboard : M19 (see table)

+
Note :I
f you press the NC's RESET key, the pickoff-spindle you oriented above will go off orientation.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.2 /9

9.6.3 Orient S1 for Profiled Part Pickoff with S4
Repère To press key Description des actions
Select PROGRAM page (MDI)
Enter over NC Keyboard : B... (0° to 360° by 1/10 degree); and press e.g B45.1
+
Press successively these 3 keys
Jog (JOG mode) Z1‐axis to check if bar enters the profiled collet of S4.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.3 /10

Unless it does, enter another offset angle over NC Keyboard, e.g. B45.
Note :
If you press the NC's RESET key, the S4 you oriented above will go off orientation and if you also oriented S1 (below), both
spindles will go.
When it does, i.e. the orientation angle is correct, continue as follows :

Enter over NC Keyboard : G600 in Channel 1 (MDI) and press
+
Press successively these 3 keys. Now the angular offset for S1 orientation inputted into NC will be taken into
account.
9.6.4 How To Check S1 Orientation Offset Angle Download
Press “RESET” on operator panel.
Orient S4 pickoff spindle at 0° i.e.: Enter over NC Keyboard : M19 in Channel 2

+
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.4 /11

Enter over NC Keyboard : B0 in Channel 1
Jog (JOG mode) Z1‐axis to check if the bar enters profiled collet of Pickoff Spindle.
Unless it does, enter G601 over NC Keyboard in Channel 1 (MDI) to cancel the angular spindle offset, and repeat
the whole operating sequence. Now continue the checking sequence as follows:
Close the pickoff spindle collet and make sure that the pickoff spindle motor power stays within 80 %.
“SYSTEM”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.4 /12

(SYSTEM) (SYSTEM) CNC 16iTB
OR
(PARAM) (PARAM) CNC 16iTB ==> DECO 13a 226-0010 / DECO 20a - V20 / DECO 26a - V20 / DECO 20a - V18
Press twice, for fanuc version 16iTA, (RIGHT PAGE), or to press once for fanuc version 16iTB
(SP.PRM) (SPINDLE PARAMETER)
(SP.MON) (SPINDLE MONITORING)
MONIT. BROCHE O0001 N00000

ALARM
. Attention !
OPERATION SPINDLE ORIENTATION
If you wnt to use S1 offset angle for part pickoff together with oriented
SPINDLE SPEED 0 RPM
polygoning, first find out the former, add to the latter and enter as fol‐
MOTOR SPEED 0 RPM
lows:
SPINDLE S1
0 5 10 15 20
LOAD 0 0 0 0
METER e.g.: S1 offset angle for Part Pickoff : 31°
CONTROL INPUT MRDY *ESP

Polygoning orientation : 15° => G251 R2 Q46
CONTROL OUTPUT SST SDT

Note : Multiply the phase shift [°] in relation to the polygoning in Vari‐
>_ able R of the G251‐code. In this example: 15° x 2 = 30°
JOG **** *** *** 09.10.03 CHAN 2
( AJU-BR ) ( REG-BR ) ( CON-BR ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.4 /13

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 9.6.4 /14

10. CHANGE GUIDEBUSH
10.1 AUXILIARY G-FUNCTIONS
10.1.2Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for DECO 7a/10a &

10.1.1Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for all DECO 7e/10e
CODE CHANNEL FUNCTION

Delete Z1 axis reference position and Z1+ soft
G400 C1
limit switch
G400 C1 Specify Z1+ soft limit switch at 705000
limit switch
G401 C1 E.g. for live guidebush:
Specify Z1+ soft limit switch Guidebush length: 89 mm
G405 A... C1 Enter G405A... where A = Guidebush Length Specify Z1+ soft limit switch at 1005000
+ 4 mm G402 C1 E.g. for stationary B11 guidebush : Guidebush
length: 60 mm
G420 C1 Specify Z1‐axis reference position
Specify Z1+ soft limit switch at 885000
G403 C1 e.g. for MAGIC or stationary B16 guidebush :
See Guidebush‐Change sequence Guidebush length: 71 mm
Specify Z1+ soft limit switch
G405 A... C1 Enter G405A... where A = Guidebush Length
G600 C1 Enable angular offset for S1‐spindle
+ 4 mm
G601 C1 Reset angular offset for S1‐spindle G420 C1 Specify Z1‐axis reference position
See angular offset of S1‐spindle See Guidebush‐Change sequence
G601 C1 Reset angular offset for S1‐spindle
See angular offset of S1‐spindle
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.1.2 /1

10.2 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 7a/10a & 7e/10e DECO 7a / 10a-7e/10e
6. Select MDI mode with Mode Selector.

Note :
Follow strictly the operating sequence for guidebush change.
If you fail, recommence. 7. Select PROGRAM page (MDI) on NC Keyboard.
- Before guidebush change, set axes in reference position.
G400 8. Enter G400 over NC Keyboard.
9. Press END OF BLOCK on NC Keyboard.
10. Press to INSERT on NC Keyboard.
11. Press “CYCLE START” on Operator Keyboard.
Alarm 000: TURN POWER OFF appears on NC

Screen.
To press key Notes
1. Select JOG mode with Mode Selector. 12. Turn power OFF.
Z1 2. Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.

13. Turn NC OFF.
3. Press to disengage Z1 from the guidebush in [+]
direction.
4. Dismount the guidebush. See Instructions 14. Turn NC ON.

300...: OPTIONS, a chapter on guidebush.
2 5. Select Channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.2 /2

To press key Notes DECO 7a / 10a-7e/10e

For another guidebush set Z1‐axis A‐reference according to this sketch
15. Turn power ON.
B
16. Select JOG mode with Mode Selector. C
A
18. Hold down one (whichever appropriate) of these S1

buttons to re‐reference Z1‐axis.
Z1
19. Set Z1‐axis reference for DECO 7a/10a - +
15mm
- Shift Z1 by Bush Length as measured + 4 mm,

e.g. if bush length is 70 mm, set spindle nose 74 mm
S1 off tool line
- If the spindle nose must enter the guidebush :
Shift Z1 by Total Bush Length B - Depth C as
Z1 measured + 4 mm
- +
15mm
?
? = 94 mm Z1‐axis reference position for live guidebush
76 mm Z1‐axis reference position for MAGIC
or stationary B16 guidebush (16 mm‐shaft)
64 mm Z1‐axis reference position for stationary B11
guidebush (11 mm‐shaft)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.2 /3

DECO 7a / 10a-7e/10e
To press key Notes
To press key Notes
30. Turn power ON.
Alarm 1008: GUIDEBUSH CHANGE IN PROG‐
RESS appears on NC Screen if a mode other than
22. Select MDI mode with Mode Selector. MDI is selected with Mode Selector.

24. “END OF BLOC”

25. “INSERT” 33. Select PROGRAM page (MDI) on NC Keyboard.
34. DECO 7a/10a

26. “START CYCLE”
G401 Enter G401 for total Z1 travel of 70 mm, e.g. for a live
Alarm 000: “Turn power off” appears on NC Screen.
guidebush.
G402 Enter G402 for total Z1 travel of 100 mm, e.g. for a fixed
27. Turn power OFF.
B11 guidebush (11mm‐shaft).
G403 Enter G403 for total Z1 travel of 88 mm, e.g. for MAGIC
28. Turn NC OFF. or fixed B16 guidebush (16mm‐shaft).
G405 A... Enter G405A... for other guidebushes.
A = Guidebush Length + 4 mm
29. Turn NC ON.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.2 /4

To press key Notes DECO 7a / 10a-7e/10e

>>>
35.“END OF BLOC”
36.“INSERT”
37.“START CYCLE”
38.Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.

Z1 39.Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.
40. Keep shifting Z1 in [+] direction until Alarm 500:
OVERTRAVEL: +Z is displayed but do not go as far
as the mechanical stop.
41.Keep shifting Z1 in [-] direction until
Alarm 501: OVERTRAVEL: -Z is displayed
but do not go as far as the mechanical stop.
42.Remount the guidebush.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.2 /5

10.3 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010
DECO 13a

Note :
If you fail, recommence. 7. Select PROGRAM page (MDI) on NC Keyboard.
- Before guidebush change, set axes in reference position.

To press key Notes
1. Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.
10. Press to INSERT on NC Keyboard.
3. Press to disengage Z1 from the guidebush in [+] 11. Press “CYCLE START” on Operator Keyboard.
direction.
4. Dismount the guidebush. See Instructions Alarm 000: TURN POWER OFF appears on NC
300...: OPTIONS, a chapter on guidebush. Screen.
2 5. Select Channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector. 12. Turn power OFF.
13. Turn NC OFF.
14. Turn NC ON.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.3 /6

DECO 13a
To press key Notes 19. Set Z1‐axis reference for DECO 13/13a 226-0001
15. Turn power ON.
18. Hold down one (whichever appropriate) of these

buttons to re‐reference Z1‐axis. S1
Z1
- +
25mm
?
? = Habegger bush: Spindle Nose Position 45 mm Off Tool Line.

? = Fixed bush: Spindle Nose Position 92 mm Off Tool Line.
? = Live bush: Spindle Nose Position 65 mm Off Tool Line.
Note : These figures concern F13-F16-F20 collets.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.3 /7


DECO 13a
B >>>
C
A
S1
Z1
- +
25mm
Shift Z1 by Bush Length as measured + 4 mm, e.g. if bush length is 70

mm, set spindle nose 74 mm off tool line.
If the spindle nose must enter the guidebush :
Shift Z1 by Total Bush Length B - Depth C as measured + 4 mm
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.3 /8

19. Set Z1‐axis reference for DECO 13a 226-0010 DECO 13a
B
C
A
S1 S1
Z1
Z1 - +
- +
25mm
?
25mm
?= Canon Habegger: Spindle Nose Position 65 mm Off Tool Line.
?= Canon Fixe: Spindle Nose Position 92 mm Off Tool Line. Shift Z1 by Bush Length as measured + 4 mm, e.g. if bush length is
?= Canon Tournant: Spindle Nose Position 65 mm Off Tool Line. 70 mm, set spindle nose 74 mm off tool line
Note : If the spindle nose must enter the guidebush: shift Z1 by Total Bush
These figures concern F13-F16-F20 collets. Length B - Depth C as measured + 4 mm
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.3 /9

DECO 13a
To press key Notes To press key Notes
2 20. Select Channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector. 30. Turn power ON.

21. Select MDI mode with Mode Selector. RESS appears on NC Screen if a mode other than
MDI is selected with Mode Selector.
33. Select PROGRAM page (MDI) on NC Keyboard.
25. “INSERT”
27. Turn power OFF.
28. Turn NC OFF.
29. Turn NC ON.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.3 /10

DECO 13a
34. DECO 13/13a 226-0001
To press key Notes
G405 A.... Enter G405A... as follows:
For in‐spindle machining: G405 A2
For in‐bush machining:
Habegger bush G405 A45
Fixed bush G405 A92
36.“INSERT”
Live bush G405 A65
Remarque :
These figures concern F13-F16-F20 collets. 37.“START CYCLE”
Other bushes G405 A... with Bush Length + 4 mm
34. DECO 13a 226-0010 38.Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.
G405 A.... Habegger bush type on NC-keyboard G405 A65 Z1 39.Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.
Fixed bush type on NC-keyboard G405 A92 40. Keep shifting Z1 in [+] direction until Alarm 500:
Live bush type on NC-keyboard G405 A65 OVERTRAVEL: +Z is displayed but do not go as far
as the mechanical stop.
Note :
These figures concern F13-F16-F20 collets.) 41.Keep shifting Z1 in [-] direction until
Alarm 501: OVERTRAVEL: -Z is displayed
Other bushes: Type G405 A... (A = bush length but do not go as far as the mechanical stop.
in mm + 4 mm) on NC-keyboard.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.3 /11

10.4 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 20/20a & 26/26a DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
Note :
If you fail, recommence.
- Before guidebush change, set axes in reference position. 10. Press to INSERT on NC Keyboard.

To press key Notes
1. Select JOG mode with Mode Selector. Alarm 000: TURN POWER OFF appears on NC
Screen.
3. Press to disengage Z1 from the guidebush in [+] 12. Turn power OFF.
direction.
4. Dismount the guidebush. See Instructions

13. Turn NC OFF.

14. Turn NC ON.

15. Turn power ON.

G400 8. Enter G400 over NC Keyboard. Z1 17. Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.4 /12

DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
19. Adjusting the Z1 axis reference taking for DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a
DECO 26 / 26a
? = Live bush 25.4 : Set spindle nose at 160 mm off tool line.
? = Live bush 32 : Set spindle nose at 160 mm off tool line.
S1
? = Habegger bush : Set spindle nose at 160 mm off tool line.
Remarque :
These figures concern F25, F30, F37 collets.
Z1
- + For another guidebush set Z1‐axis A‐reference according to this sketch
B
25mm
? C
A
S1
DECO 20 / 20a
? = Fixed bush : Set spindle nose at 120 mm off tool line. Z1
- +
? = Live bush : Set spindle nose at 120 mm off tool line.
? = 2‐position bush : Set spindle nose at 120 mm off tool line.
? = Habegger bush : Set spindle nose at 120 mm off tool line.
Remarque : 25mm
These figures concern F20, F25, F30 collets.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.4 /13

DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
Shift Z1 by Bush Length as measured + 4 mm, e.g. if bush length is 70 To press key Notes
mm, set spindle nose 74 mm off tool line. Alarm 000: “Turn power off” appears on NC Screen.
If the spindle nose must enter the guidebush : Shift Z1 by Total Bush
Length B - Depth C as measured + 4 mm. 27. Turn power OFF.
To press key Notes
28. Turn NC OFF.

21. Select MDI mode with Mode Selector. 29. Turn NC ON.

30. Turn power ON.

RESS appears on NC Screen if a mode other than
24. “END OF BLOC” MDI is selected with Mode Selector.
25. “INSERT”

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.4 /14

DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a

34. DECO 20 / 20a / 26 / 26a To press key Notes
Enter G405 A... as follows :
G405 A.... DECO 20 / 20a:
Fixed bush : Enter G405 A120 36.“INSERT”

Live bush : Enter G405 A120
2‐position bush : : Enter G405 A120
Habegger bush : Enter G405 A120
DECO 26 / 26a:
38.Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.
Fixed bush : Enter G405 A160 Z1 39.Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.
Live bush : Enter G405 A160 40. Keep shifting Z1 in [+] direction until Alarm 500:
Habegger bush : Enter G405 A160 OVERTRAVEL: +Z is displayed but do not go as far
Other bushes : Enter G405 A... with as the mechanical stop.
Bush Length + 4 mm
41.Keep shifting Z1 in [-] direction until
Note : Alarm 501: OVERTRAVEL: -Z is displayed
These data concern the F20, F25, F30 and F37 but do not go as far as the mechanical stop.
collets.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.4 /15

10.5 CHANGE GUIDEBUSH FOR DECO 13b/bi DECO 13b / bi
Note :
If you fail, recommence.
- Before guidebush change, set axes in reference position. 10. Press to INSERT on NC Keyboard.

To press key Notes
1. Select JOG mode with Mode Selector. Alarm 000: TURN POWER OFF appears on NC
Screen.
3. Press to disengage Z1 from the guidebush in [+] 12. Turn power OFF.
direction.
4. Dismount the guidebush. See Instructions

13. Turn NC OFF.

14. Turn NC ON.

15. Turn power ON.

G400 8. Enter G400 over NC Keyboard. Z1 17. Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.5 /16

19. Set Z1‐axis reference for DECO 13b/13bi DECO 13b / bi

B
C
A
S1
S1
Z1
- +
Z1
- +
25mm
? 25mm
Canon Habegger: Shift Z1 by Bush Length as measured + 4 mm,

1) Spindle Nose Position 45 mm off Tool Line for lathe without SSF 13 bi e.g. if bush length is 70 mm, set spindle nose 74 mm off tool line.
barfeeder. If the spindle nose must enter the guidebush :
2) Spindle Nose Position 55 mm off Tool Line for lathe with SSF 13 bi Shift Z1 by Total Bush Length B - Depth C as measured + 4 mm
barfeeder. Note : For lathe equipped with the SSF 13 bi barfeeder, GuiBush
Note : Minimum remnant length for SSF 13 bi barfeeder is 90 mm. Length min. is 55 mm.
Fixed guidebush : Spindle Nose Position 92 mm off Tool Line
Live guidebush : Spindle Nose Position 65 mm off Tool Line
Note : These figures concern F13, F16 & F20 collets.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.5 /17

DECO 13b / bi
To press key Notes To press key Notes
2 20. Select Channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector. 30. Turn power ON.

21. Select MDI mode with Mode Selector. RESS appears on NC Screen if a mode other than
MDI is selected with Mode Selector.
25. “INSERT”
27. Turn power OFF.
28. Turn NC OFF.
29. Turn NC ON.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.5 /18

DECO 13b / bi
34. DECO 13b/13bi To press key Notes

G405 A.... Enter G405 A... as follows :
For in‐spindle machining: G405 A2 35.“END OF BLOC”
Habegger gun:
Type in G405 A45 on the keyboard if the 36.“INSERT”
machine is not fitted with the SSF 13bi built-in
feeder.
Type in G405 A55 on the keyboard if the
machine is fitted with the SSF 13bi built-in feed‐
er. 38.Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.
Habegger bush G405 A45 Z1 39.Select Z1‐axis with Axis / Channel Selector.
Fixed bush G405 A92 40. Keep shifting Z1 in [+] direction until Alarm 500:
OVERTRAVEL: +Z is displayed but do not go as far
Live bush G405 A65 as the mechanical stop.
Note : 41.Keep shifting Z1 in [-] direction until
These figures concern F13, F16, F20 collets. Alarm 501: OVERTRAVEL: -Z is displayed
Other bushes G405 A... but do not go as far as the mechanical stop.
With Bush Length + 4 mm
A min. = 55 mm for lathe equipped with SSF 13 bi.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.5 /19

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 10.5 /20

11. SPINDLES ROTATION CONTROL
Note:
-The doors opening causes the spindles and turning tools to stop revolving.
- Doors open, in automatic cycle, the spindles and turning tools are not turning.
- Doors open, in MDI, only the rotation of the spindle and pickoff-spindle at 50 rpm is permitted.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11. /1

11.1 OVERRIDE, STOP & RESTART SPINDLES

11.1.1 While Program is being Processed
Object: Slow Down / Speed Up Spindles without Interrupting Program Execution
Slow down spindle rotation,...
...Hold down Minus[-] Spindle Speed Override Button ...for DECO 13a 226-0010/13/13a: S1-S2-S4-S5
or for DECO 7a/10a/20/26/20a/26a: S1-S2-S3-S4,
or for DECO 13b/13bi: S1-S2-S3,
or for DECO 7a/10a (CNC 16i TA) S1-S2-S3-S4,
or for DECO 7a/10a-7e/10e (CNC 16i TB) S1-S2-S4-S5.
Speed up spindle rotation,...
Hold down Plus[+] Spindle Speed Override Button. Remarque:

Analogue control
The speed grows until the button is released or it reaches Pressing Spindle Speed Override keys only does not
120% of the programmed speed.Or press both Plus[+] and affect S3* and S6* or S5**spindles during program
Minus[-] buttons together to set spindle override at 100%. execution.
S3* and S6* or S5** can be stopped only if the program
execution is interrupted with “CYCLE STOP”.
*S3 et S6 -->> DECO 13a-226-0010/13/13a,
**S5 -->> DECO 20/26/20a/26a.
**S5 -->> DECO 13b / bi
*S6 -->> DECO 20/26/20a/26a
**S5 -->> DECO 7a/10a CNC 16i TA,
*S3 -->> DECO 7a/10a CNC 16i TB.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.1.1 /2

11.1.2 When program has been interrupted

Object: Turn Spindles OFF / ON with Interrupting Program Execution
*S3 et S6 -->> DECO 13a-226-0010/13/13a,
**S5 -->> DECO 7a/10a-7e/10e/20/26/20a/26a.
**S5 -->> DECO 13b / bi
*S6 -->> DECO 20/26/20a/26a
**S5 -->> DECO 7a/10a CNC 16i TA,
*S3 -->> DECO 7a/10a CNC 16i TB.
To stop the spindles rotation
Press “CYCLE STOP” pushbutton to interrupt program execution.
Press Minus[-] Spindle Speed Override Button.

All spindles (including S3* and S6* or S5**) stop. depending on the machines** *.
To restart the spindles rotation
Press Plus[+] Spindle Speed Override Button.

All spindles (including S3* and S6* or S5**) stop. depending on the machines** *, are restarted. start again.
OR
Press CYCLE START pushbutton. All spindles (including S3* and S6* or S5**) restart at programmed speed. depending
on the machines** *.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.1.2 /3

11.2 ROTATION OF SPINDLES AND ROTATING IN MDI MODE
Note:
-The doors opening causes the spindles and turning tools to stop revolving.
- Doors open, in automatic cycle, the spindles and turning tools are not turning.
- Doors open, in MDI, only the rotation of the spindle and pickoff-spindle at 50 rpm is permitted.
11.2.1 Spindle and rotating tool code

Note :
The rotation and stop codes for the spindles and rotating tools are
identical for all of the machines.
Auxiliary
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
function
Clockwise
M 103 S M 203 S M 303 S M 403 S M 503 S M 603 S
(CW)
Counter-
M 104 S M 204 S M 304 S M 404 S M 504 S M 604 S clockwise
(CCW)
Stop
M 105 M 205 M 305 M 405 M 505 M 605
spindle
11.2.2 Digital spindle programming procedure
Note:
MDI mode with its ISO code bears no relation to AUTO (MEM) mode and its operation using a TABLE. In other words, there are certain differences in the
way that they operate.
Please refer to the next page to follow the programming procedure.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.2.2 /4

Digital spindles Successively press the keys shown below

Select Concerns the following digital spindles :
Spindle Channel 1 DECO 7a/10a (CNC 16i TA) S1-S2-S3-S4

programming OR DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e (CNC 16i TB) S1-S2-S4-S5
Channel 2 DECO 13/13a/13a-226-0010 S1-S2-S4-S5
Clockwise
DECO 13b/13bi S1-S2-S3
(CW)
rotation DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a S1-S2-S3-S4
Rotation
Input
acti‐
Counter-
No code vated in
clockwise
depending on the
(CCW)
the spindle desired
rotation
direc‐
M xxx Sxxxx
tion
e.g. Code M 304 Sxxxx =

Tool on chaser 1 S3 rotation coun‐
terclockwise Code M xx5
OR
Stop
rotation Stop
spindle
rotation
Note : OR
Programming the stopping of the
rotation differs according to the
spindles or rotating tools and accor‐
ding to the type of machine.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.2.2 /5

DECO 7a/10a - 0015 à

11.2.3 Programming applications table
0019 (CNC 16i TB)
Spindle - DECO 7e/10e Digital spindle
S5 2
Application rotating Chan‐ Programming procedure
to machines tools nel procedure DECO 13/13a-226-0001
Sx DECO 13a-226-0010
DECO 7a/10a-7e/10e /13 DECO 7a/10a 2

Rotation controller
(CNC 16i TA) S5 inactive (for analog
DECO 13a-226-0001 Digital spindle
S1 & S2 1 DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a spindles)
procedure 1
DECO 13a-226-0010
DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a Rotation controller
DECO 13b/13bi S5 2 inactive (for analog
DECO 7a/10a spindles)
(CNC 16i TA) Digital spindle
S3 2 Rotation controller
procedure
DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a S6 2 inactive (for analog
spindles)
DECO 13a-226-0010 Rotation controller
S3 2 inactive (for analog DECO 13a-226-0010 Rotation controller
DECO 13/13a-226-0001 spindles) S6 1 inactive (for analog
DECO 13/13a-226-0001 spindles)
DECO 13/13a-226-0001
Digital spindle Digital spindle
DECO 13a-226-0010 S4 2 DECO 13b/13bi S1 & S3 1
procedure procedure
DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a
Change channel in
DECO 13b/13bi S2 2
Digital spindle the general procedure
DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e S4 2
procedure
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.2.3 /6

11.2.4 Programming procedure for analogue rotating tools
Note :
This or these rotating tool(s) are driven by a frequency converter with no speed control.
In order to guarantee the actual speed (on motor), monitor the speed on the rotating tool using a revolution counter.
Below 1000 rpm the spindle cannot be guaranteed to work properly (torque problem at low speed).
For the difference between the required speed and the actual speed, a 10% margin of error is tolerated.
The speed programmed in MDI in number of revolutions per minute is the speed of the motor. You need to take the motor / spindle ratio into account.
e.g. Analogue control S5 DECO 7a/10a (CNC 16i TA)

When you programme M503 S4000 in MDI, the rotating tools revolve at 8000 rpm. If the motor/spindle ratio is 1: 2.
On the display, the speed shown is the speed of the rotating tools.
In MDI, M503 S4000 = S8000 on the display, if the motor/spindle ratio is 1:2.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.2.4 /7

Analogue control Successively press the keys shown below

Select
Concerns the following analog spindles :
Programming Channel 1
rotating tools DECO 7a/10a (CNC 16i TA) S5
OR
DECO 7a/10a (CNC 16i TB) S3
Channel 2
Clockwise DECO 13/13a/13a-226-0010 S3-S6
(CW) DECO 13b/13bi S5
rotation
DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a S5-S6
Input Rotation
acti‐
Counter- No code
vated in
clockwise depending on
the
(CCW) the rotating
desired
rotation tool
direc‐
M xxx Sxxxx tion
Code M xx5
OR
Stop Stop
rotation spindle
rotation
. Attention !
The spindle speed control is inactive in MDI mode for the Sx rotating tool. So you OR
will need to set the tool's speed control to 100% before programming a spindle rota‐
tion Sx. Con‐
troller
inactive
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 11.2.4 /8

12. AUXILIARY M AND G - FUNCTIONS (PROGRAMMABLE ONLY EN MDI MODE)
12.1 AUXILIARY M‐FUNCTIONS ONLY FOR MDI
Chan‐ Permitted with the doors

CODE FUNCTION DO (F)
nel. open
12.1.1(M08-M151) Specific to toutes les DECO
M08 C1 Coolant ON NO F190.4

M09 C1 Coolant OFF YES F190.5
M10 C1 Close spindle collet YES F190.1
M11 C1 Open spindle collet YES F190.0
M19 C2 Position S4‐spindle at 0° and spindle S2 for DECO 13bi YES

B.. C1 S1 spindle positioning (e.g. B90) YES
M32 C1 Check tool breakage on Sensor 1 YES F194.2

M33 C1 Check part present on Sensor 1 YES F194.3
Check part absence in gripper: Absence gives Alarm 1033

M38 C1 YES F197.2
DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010, 13b/bi
Check part presence in gripper: Presence gives Alarm 1032.
M39 C1 YES F197.3
DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010, 13b/bi
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.1 /1


nel. open
M45 C1 15 / 20bar‐pump ON (Coolant ON necessary) NO F195.0

M46 C1 15 / 20bar‐pump OFF YES F195.1
M60 C1 Cancel order to load a new bar (k15.0=0-k15.1=0k15.2=0) Load a new bar YES F192.7
M82 C1 Barfeeder thrust ON NO F193.1
M83 C1 Barfeeder thrust OFF YES F193.2
M84 C1 Advance part ejector (not for DECO 7a/10a)(not for DECO 7e/10e) NO F195.4
M85 C1 Retract part ejector (not for DECO 7a/10a)(not for DECO 7e/10e) NO F195.5
M103 C1 Main spindle S1 ON cw (Spindle 1 C1) Maximum 50 rpm

M104 C1 Main spindle S1 ON ccw (Spindle 1 C1) Maximum 50 rpm
M105 C1 Main spindle S1 OFF (Spindle 1 C1) YES
M110 C2 Close counter-spindle collet YES F190.3

M111 C2 Open counter-spindle collet YES F190.2
M124 C1 Advance drill 1 (only for DECO 7a/10a - DECO 7e/10e) NO F191.0
M125 C1 Retract drill 1 (only for DECO 7a/10a - DECO 7e/10e) NO F191.1
M150 C1 Lock feedrate override 100% NO F194.0

M151 C1 Cancel M150 NO F194.1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.1 /2


nel. open
12.1.2(M160-M165) Specific to DECO 7a / 10a & 7e/10e
M160 C1 Advance manipulator / part catcher NO F190.6

M161 C1 Retract manipulator / part catcher NO F190.7
M162 C1 Swing manipulator out NO F193.3
M163 C1 Swing manipulator in NO F193.4
M164 C1 Close manipulator gripper YES F193.5
M165 C1 Open manipulator gripper YES F193.6
12.1.3(M160-M169) Specific to DECO 13 / 13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010
M160 C1 Advance part recuperator chute NO F190.6

M161 C1 Retract part recuperator chute NO F190.7
M162 C1 F193.3
M163 C1 F193.4
M164 C1 Close part gripper YES F193.5
M165 C1 Open part gripper YES F193.6
M168 C1 Check part absence in gripper / pickoff collet : Absence gives Alarm 1033. YES F197.0
M169 C1 Check part presence in gripper / pickoff collet : Presence gives Alarm 1032. YES F197.1
12.1.4(M160-M173) Specific to DECO 13b / 13bi
M160 C1 Advance part catcher NO F190.6

M161 C1 Retract part catcher NO F190.7
M162 C1 F193.3
M163 C1 F193.4
M164 C1 F193.5
M165 C1 F193.6
M168 C1 F197.0
M169 C1 F197.1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.4 /3


nel. open
12.1.5(M160-M169) Specific to DECO 20 / 26 & 20a / 26a
M160 C1 Advance manipulator NO F190.6

M161 C1 Retract manipulator NO F190.7
M162 C1 Swing manipulator out NO F193.3
M163 C1 Swing manipulator in NO F193.4
M164 C1 Close manipulator gripper YES F193.5
M165 C1 Open manipulator gripper YES F193.6
M166 C1 Manipulator arm to guidebush feed (only for DECO 20/26) NO F195.2
M167 C1 Manipulator arm retract in backwork (only for DECO 20/26) NO F195.3
M168 C1 Check part absence in manipulator jaws / cage (G912) YES F197.0
M169 C1 Check part presence in manipulator jaws / cage (G923) YES F197.1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.5 /4


nel. open
12.1.6(M170-M192) Specific to all DECO
M170 C1 Enable Z4 torque limit (Z2 for DECO 13b / 13bi) YES F189.0
M171 C1 Disable Z4 torque limit (Z2 for DECO 13b / 13bi) YES F189.1
M172 C1 Enable check contouring error for Z4 (Z2 for DECO 13b / 13bi) YES F189.2
M173 C1 Disable check contouring error for Z4 (Z2 for DECO 13b / 13bi) YES F189.3
M180 C1 Advance long‐part ejector (Y5.7=1) NO F198.0

M181 C1 Retract long‐part ejector (Y5.7=0) NO F198.1
M182 C1 Advance thrustor for long‐part recuperator tipper (Y5.5=1) NO F198.2

M183 C1 Retract thrustor for long‐part recuperator tipper (Y5.5=0) NO F198.3
M184 C1 Tip long part ON (Y5.3=1) NO F198.4

M185 C1 Tip long part OFF (Y5.3=0) NO F198.5
M186 C1 Check retract long‐part ejector (Y5.7=1 X8.0=1) YES F198.6

M187 C1 Check advance long‐part ejector (Y5.7=0 X8.2=1) YES F198.7
M188 C1 Check thrustor advance for long part recuperator tipper (Y5.5=1 X9.0=1) YES F199.0
M189 C1 Check thrustor retract for long part recuperator tipper (Y5.5=0 X9.2=1) YES F199.1
M190 C1 Close guidebush command (5 bars) Poggipolini guidebush + JBS Y8.7 = 1 YES F192.5
M191 C1 Set guidebush command (Y6.6=0) YES F192.4
M191 C1 Set guidebush command (2 bars) Poggipolini guidebush + JBS Y8.0 = 1 YES F192.4
M192 C1 Open guidebush command (Y6.6=1) YES F192.6
M193 C1 Open guidebush command (0 bars) Poggipolini guidebush + JBS Y8.7 + Y8.0 = 1 YES F192.6
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.6 /5


nel. open
12.1.7(M203-M605) Specific to DECO 7a / 10a & 7e/10e
M203 C1 S2 polygoning spindle ON cw (Spindle 2 channel1) NO

M204 C1 S2 polygoning spindle ON ccw (Spindle 2 channel1) NO
M205 C1 S2 polygoning spindle OFF (Spindle 2 channel1) YES
M224 C1 Advance Drill 2 NO F191.2

M225 C1 Retract Drill 2 NO F191.3
M303 C2 S3 C2 Spindle 2 ON cw CNC 16i TA NO

M304 C2 S3 C2 Spindle 2 ON ccw CNC 16i TA NO
M305 C2 S3 C2 Spindle 2 OFF CNC 16i TA YES
S3 C2 Spindle 3 ON cw CNC 16i TB

M303 C2 NO
(not for DECO 7e/10e)
S3 C2 Spindle 3 ON ccw CNC 16i TB
M304 C2 NO
S3 C2 Spindle 3 OFF CNC 16i TB
M305 C2 YES
M324 C1 Advance Drill 3 (not for DECO 7e/10e) NO F191.4

M325 C1 Retract Drill 3 (not for DECO 7e/10e) NO F191.5
M403 C2 S4 C2 Spindle 1 ON cw Maximum 50 rpm

M404 C2 S4 C2 Spindle 1 ON ccw Maximum 50 rpm
M405 C2 S4 C2 Spindle 1 OFF YES
M503 C2 S5 C2 Spindle 3 ON (S5) cw CNC 16i TA NO

M504 C2 S5 C2 Spindle 3 ON (S5) ccw CNC 16i TA NO
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.7 /6


nel. open
M505 C2 S5 C2 Spindle 3 OFF(S5) CNC 16i TA YES
M503 C2 S5 C2 Spindle 2 ON (S5) cw CNC 16i TB NO

M504 C2 S5 C2 Spindle 2 ON (S5) ccw CNC 16i TB NO
M505 C2 S5 C2 Spindle 2 OFF (S5) CNC 16i TB YES
M600 Activation of associated contour milling (Programmable only by TB-Déco not in MDI mode) - F220.0
M601 Deactivation of associated contour milling (Programmable only by TB-Déco not in MDI mode) - F220.1
M603 C1 F220.3
M604 C2 Switching external whirling spindle on NO F220.4
M605 C2 Switching external whirling spindle off NO F220.5
12.1.8(M203-M605) Specific to DECO 13 / 13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010
M203 C1 S2 Spindle ON cw (Mainwork Gang 2) (Spindle 2 C1) NO

M204 C1 S2 Spindle ON ccw (Mainwork Gang 2) (Spindle 2 C1) NO
M205 C1 S2 Spindle ON (Mainwork Gang 2) (Spindle 2 C1) YES
M224 C1 F191.2
M225 C1 F191.3
M303 C2 S3 Spindle ON cw (Frontwork Gang) (Spindle 3 Channel 1) NO

M304 C2 S3 Spindle ON ccw (Frontwork Gang) (Spindle 3 Channel 1) NO
M305 C2 S3 Spindle OFF (Frontwork Gang) (Spindle 3 Channel 1) YES
M324 C1 F191.4
M325 C1 F191.5
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.8 /7


nel. open
M403 C2 Pickoff Spindle S4 ON cw (Spindle 1 C2) Maximum 50 rpm
M404 C2 Pickoff Spindle S4 ON ccw (Spindle 1 C2) Maximum 50 rpm
M405 C2 Pickoff Spindle S4 OFF (Spindle 1 C2) YES
M503 C2 S5 Spindle ON cw (Backwork Gang) (Spindle 2 C2) NO

M504 C2 S5 Spindle ON ccw (Backwork Gang) (Spindle 2 C2) NO
M505 C2 S5 Spindle OFF (Backwork Gang) (Spindle 2 C2) YES
M602 Bistable F220.2
M603 C1 S6 Spindle ON cw (Mainwork Gang 1) (Spindle 3 Channel 1) NO F220.3
M604 C1 S6 Spindle ON ccw (Mainwork Gang 1) (Spindle 3 Channel 1) NO F220.4
M605 C1 S6 Spindle OFF (Mainwork Gang 1) (Spindle 3 Channel 1) YES F220.5
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.8 /8


nel. open
12.1.9(M203-M605) Specific to DECO 20 / 26 & 20a / 26a
M203 C1 S2 polygoning spindle ON cw (Spindle 2 Channel 1) NO

M204 C1 S2 polygoning spindle ON ccw (Spindle 2 Channel 1) NO
M205 C1 S2 polygoning spindle OFF (Spindle 2 Channel 1) YES
M303 C2 S3 C2 Spindle 2 ON cw NO
M304 C2 S3 C2 Spindle 2 ON ccw NO
M403 C2 S4 C2 Spindle 1 ON cw Maximum 50 rpm

M404 C2 S4 C2 Spindle 1 ON ccw Maximum 50 rpm
M606 C1 Activate 20-bar coolant spraying at guidebush : Coolant ON (M08) + 20-bar pump (M45) necessary NO F2280
Deactivate 20-bar coolant spraying at guidebush : Coolant OFF (M09) or Start 20-bar pump (M46)
M607 C1 NO F2281
or STOP CYCLE
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.9 /9


nel. open
12.1.10 (M203-M605) Specific to DECO 13b / 13bi
M203 C2 S2‐spindle ON cw (Spindle 1 Channel 2) NO

M204 C2 S2‐spindle ON ccw (Spindle 1 Channel 2) NO
M205 C2 S2‐spindle OFF (Spindle 1 Channel 2) YES
M224 C1 F191.2
M225 C1 F191.3
M303 C1 S3‐spindle ON cw (Spindle 2 Channel 1) NO
M304 C1 S3‐spindle ON ccw (Spindle 2 Channel 1) NO
M305 C1 S3‐spindle OFF (Spindle 2 Channel 1) YES
M324 C1 F191.4
M325 C1 F191.5
M403 C2
M404 C2
M405 C2
M503 C2 Backwork rotation command (S5) clockwise (CW) (Spindle 3 Channel 2) NO

M504 C2 Backwork rotation command (S5) anti-clockwise (ACW) (Spindle 3 Channel 2) NO
M505 C2 Backwork rotation stop command (S5) (Spindle 3 Channel 2) YES
M603 C1 F220.3
M604 C1 F220.4
M605 C1 F220.5
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.10 /10


nel. open
12.1.11 (M606-M611) Pump incorporated into the machine for all DECOs
M606 C1 Valve 1 ON (YV212) Tool Lubrication (Y7.4=1) K22.5=0 NO F220.6

M607 C1 Valve 1 OFF (YV212) Tool Lubrication (Y7.4=0) K22.5=0 NO F220.7
12.1.12 (M606-M611) 20 bar pump external to the machine for all DECOs

12.1.13 (M612-M619) Specific to DECO 13 / 13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010

M614 C2 Outside‐Whirling Spindle ON NO F221.6
M615 C2 Outside‐Whirling Spindle OFF NO F221.7
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.13 /11

Chan‐ Permitted with

nel. the doors open
12.1.14 (M620-M895) Specific to all DECO
M620 C1 Self-adjusting HP pump ON Y6.1=1 Coolant Valve YV7.0 K22.4=0 NO F222.4 F222.5=0
M624 C1 Self-adjusting HP pump: Selection of Pressure-Delivery Curve 1; Y7.3= 0 - Y7.1= 0 NO F223.0 F223.1=1
M625 C1 Self-adjusting HP pump: Selection of Pressure-Delivery Curve 2; Y7.3= 0 - Y7.1= 0 - K22.4 = 0 NO F223.1 F223.0=0
M626 C1 Self-adjusting HP pump: Selection of Pressure-Delivery Curve 3; Y7.3= 1 - Y7.1= 0 - K22.4 = 0 NO F223.2 F223.3=0
M627 C1 Self-adjusting HP pump: Selection of Pressure-Delivery Curve 4; Y7.3= 1 - Y7.1= 1 NO F223.3 F223.2=0
M628 Self-adjusting HP pump: Reserved for use in AUTO (DO) NO F223.4 F223.5=0
M629 Self-adjusting HP pump: Reserved for use in AUTO (DO) NO F223.5 F223.4=0
M620 C1 2nd HP pump ON Coolant Valve YV7.0 (Y6.1=1) K22.4=1 NO F222.4

2nd HP
M621 C1 2nd HP pump OFF Coolant Valve YV.70 (Y6.1=0) K22.4=1 NO F222.5 pump
M622 C1 2nd HP pump ON Coolant Valve YV7.1 (Y6.3=1) K22.4=1 NO F222.6 (deep
drilling)
M623 C1 2nd HP pump OFF Coolant Valve YV7.1 (Y6.3=0) K22.4=1 NO F222.7
M625 C1 2nd HP pump (Deep Drilling) ON Y7.1 = 1 2 controllers K22.4 = 1 NO F223.1 2nd HP
pump
(deep
M626 C1 2nd HP pump (Deep Drilling) OFF Y7.1 = 0 2 controllers K22.4 = 1 NO F223.2
drilling)
M700 C1 SBF216 or SBF532 Barfeeder: Closing of Steady Rest (Code M programmable only in MDI) NO
M701 C1 SBF216 Barfeeder: Opening of Steady Rest (Code M programmable only in MDI) NO
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.14 /12


nel. open
Activation of 2nd soft limit (param. 1326-1327, k23.6=1 (Code M programmable only in MDI mode)
M750 C1 YES
specific to DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
Deactivation of 2nd soft limit (param. 1326-1327, k23.6=1 (Code M programmable only in MDI
M751 C1 mode) YES
specific to DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
M811 C1 Enable Output 1 on Optional Socket 1 (Y4.6 = 1) NO F176.3

M812 C1 Disable Output 1 on Optional Socket 1 (Y4.6 = 0) NO F176.5



M831 C1 Enable Output 4.3 = 1 over K10.0=1 NO F180.3

M832 C1 Disable Output 4.3 = 0 over K10.0=1 NO F180.5


M880 C1 Air ON, LASER Sensor 1 (Y0001.6=1) NO F185.0

M881 C1 Air OFF, LASER Sensor 1 (Y0001.6=0) NO
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.14 /13


nel. open
M886 C1 Coolant ON + Flush pickoff‐spindle collet ON / OFF in 2 s Timer T26 NO F185.6
M887 C1 Enable Y 4.3 =1 over K10.0=0 Disable in 2 s Timer T28 NO F185.7

Enable Y 5.4 =1 HF NSK Spindle 1 & 3

M890 C1 NO F186.2
All machines except DECO 7a/10a - DECO 7e/10e
Disable Y 5.4 =0 HF NSK Spindle 1 & 3
M891 C1 NO F186.3
Enable Y 5.2 =1 HF NSK Spindle 2 & 4
M892 C1 NO F186.4
Disable Y 5.2 =0 HF NSK Spindle 2 & 4
M893 C1 NO F186.5
Enable Y5.4 = 1 (HF Spindle 1)

M890 C1 NO F186.2
Specific to DECO 7a / 10a - DECO 7e/10e
Disable Y5.4 = 0 (HF Spindle 2)
M891 C1 NO F186.3
Enable Y5.2 = 1 (HF Spindle 3)
M892 C1 NO F186.4
Disable Y5.2 = 0 (HF Spindle 4)
M893 C1 NO F186.5
M894 C1 Enable Y5.0 = 1 (deep drilling pump) NO F186.6

M895 C1 Disable Y5.0 = 0 (deep drilling pump) NO F186.7
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.1.14 /14

12.2 AUXILIARY G-FUNCTIONS (THESE FUNCTIONS ARE PERMITTED WITH THE DOORS OPEN)
12.2.1Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for all DECO 12.2.2Auxiliary G-Functions only for MDI for DECO 7a/10a &
7e/10e

Delete Z1 axis reference position and Z1+ soft G400 C1
G400 C1 limit switch
limit switch
G401 C1 E.g. for live guidebush:
Guidebush length: 89 mm
G405 A... C1 Enter G405A... where A = Guidebush Length
+ 4 mm Specify Z1+ soft limit switch at 1005000
G402 C1 E.g. for stationary B11 guidebush : Guidebush
G420 C1 Specify Z1‐axis reference position length: 60 mm
See Guidebush‐Change sequence G403 C1 e.g. for MAGIC or stationary B16 guidebush :
Guidebush length: 71 mm
G600 C1 Enable angular offset for S1‐spindle G405 A... C1 Enter G405A... where A = Guidebush Length
G601 C1 Reset angular offset for S1‐spindle + 4 mm
G420 C1 Specify Z1‐axis reference position
See Guidebush‐Change sequence
G601 C1 Reset angular offset for S1‐spindle
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.2.2 /15

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 12.2.2 /16

13. AUTO(MATIC) MODE
13.1 START / STOP PROGRAM EXECUTION

Object: Part Machining.
To start with: No program is being executed.
A new program is in NC.
No Alarm Class > 1.
Select AUTO mode.
Press to resume execution interrupted with “CYCLE STOP”.

“START CYCLE”
Press to resume execution interrupted with “END‐OF‐
Active program execution.
TABLE.”
“STOP CYCLE”
Displacements or dwells are immediately interrupted.
interrupt program execution.
“END OF TABLE”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.1 /1

Press Minus[-] Pushbutton to reset feedrate at 0 and stop

Axis feedrate override. program execution.
(See chapter “Usere interface”) Press Plus[+] Pushbutton to recover feedrate and continue
program execution.
13.2 DISPLAY AXIS POSITION
To display position of axes :

OR
“POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.2 /2

13.3 EDIT BATCH PRODUCTION

The machine can be programmed for the execution of a pre‐determined number of parts.
If the MACHINED PARTS indication is equal to that of the NUMBER OF PARTS TO PRODUCE, the machine stops at the end‐of‐part and displays END‐
OF‐BATCH message.
If this function is not required, enter 0 into the NUMBER OF PARTS TO PRODUCE parameter. The machine will not stop then.
OR To display axes position “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH”
(M20) Soft key (M20)
NUMBER OF PARTS TO PRODUCE - 120
MACHINED PARTS - 76
TOTAL NUMBER OF PARTS - 1234

NUM=
MDI **** *** *** 08:32:30 CHAN 1
( PTOTAL ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.3 /3

Press to move the cursor to NUMBER OF PARTS TO PRODUCE.
Enter the number of parts required over NC Keyboard. “INPUT”.
Sequence to alter total number of parts:

(PTOTAL) (PTOTAL)
Enter the figure as required over NC Keyboard.
“INPUT”.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.3 /4

13.4 INTERRUPTION, INSPECTION DURING AN AUTO CYCLE

Object: To interrupt part program execution and when necessary, to stop spindle for inspection of finished part or tools, proceed as follows :
Press to interrupt program execution.

“STOP CYCLE”
AXIS FEEDRATE OVERRIDE Δ Caution !

According to the circumstances, interrupting the automatic
You can stop program execution with Minus[-] Pushbutton cycle can cause damage to the work and/or tools.
to reset feedrate at 0.
(See also chapter “User interface”)
Spindles OFF : Press Minus[-] Pushbutton of Spindle

Speed Override.
Spindles ON : Press Plus[+] Pushbutton of Spindle Speed
Spindles resume now their speed as programmed.
Override.
TO RESUME PART PROGRAM EXECUTION :

Program execution is resumed where it was interrupted.
“START CYCLE”
Note :
Press to make spindles regain their speeds. Do not turn the power off as this automatically resets the
program.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4 /5

13.4.1Interrupt Over M01

Object: To interrupt part program execution for inspection of finished part or tools proceed as follows:
OR To display axes position: “POS” ou “CUSTOM GRAPH”
(M01) Press M01 softkey at the bottom of NC Screen to display:
Press ACTIVE softkey at the bottom of NC Screen to display M01 ACTIVE and stop the machine each time the program
(ACTIVE)
comes to a M01 (the screen above).
“START CYCLE” , to restart the program which will be interrupted at the next M01.
Press INACTI softkey at the bottom of NC Screen to display M01 INACTIVE and to disable M01 program (machine) stop
(INACTI)
(the screen below).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.1 /6

M01 ACTIVE M01 INACTIVE
NUM = 5 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 08: 36: 44 CHAN 1 MEM **** *** *** 08: 36: 44 CHAN 1
( ACTIVE ) ( INACTI ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ACTIVE ) ( INACTI ) ( ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.1 /7

13.4.2Interrupt Over STOP‐AT‐A‐DETERMINED‐TIME

Object: Interrupt part program execution for inspection of finished part or tools.
OR To display axis position “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH”
(STOP) (STOP)
Note :
(INACTI) (INACTI)
STOP AT TIME is not valid for the INIT program.
Enter 685 over NC Keyboard e.g. The ITP time required for a program to stop at is 685.
“INPUT”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.2 /8

(ACTIVE) (ACTIVE)
(INACTI) The program stops the machine at each N685 time as long
as STOP AT TIME is active because STOP AT TIME must Note :
be inactive when its time is altered. STOP AT TIME is not valid for the INIT program.
(INACTI)
STOP AT TIME STOP AT TIME
N 685 N 685
ACTIVE INACTIVE
NUM= 5 0 T0000 NUM= 5 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 10: 25: 37 CHAN 1 MEM **** *** *** 10: 25: 37 CHAN 1
( ACTIV ) ( INACTI ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ACTIV ) ( INACTI ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Stopping the programme at N685 is inactive.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.2 /9

13.4.3Interrupt Over END‐OF‐TABLE

Object: Interrupt auto cycle OVER end‐of‐table for inspection.
“FIN DE TABLE”
Interrupt program execution at END‐OF‐TABLE.
Press again, to disable this function. The pushbutton (light) comes off.
“START CYCLE” , to restart the program from the beginning.
Notes:
Press CYCLE START to execute the next program if the previous program stopped at the end‐of‐table of a non‐relooped program such as initialization program
(O0001) or load‐a‐new‐bar program, etc.
Press CYCLE START to execute the program from the beginning if the program stopped at the end‐of‐table of a relooped program, e.g. of a machining program.
END‐OF‐TABLE pushbutton (light) comes on and each time the program stops at the end‐of‐table, you can machine part by part with the CYCLE START
pushbutton
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.3 /10

13.4.4Interrupt Over AXIS‐RETRACT

Note :
The ”AXIS RETRACT” function can only be used with the doors closed
Object: To interrupt a program in auto cycle and clear the axes for better inspection of the part or tools and to resume the program at the point of inter‐
ruption, proceed as follows:
Note : No application in the INIT program.
“STOP CYCLE” Displacements or dwells are immediately interrupted.
Select JOG mode with Mode Selector.
OR
x1 - x10 -
Select an increment.
x100 - x1K

Speed Override.
Override.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.4 /11

Select the axis as required.
Press Plus[+] or Minus[-] Pushbutton to jog an axis in the

The axis selected moves with 5% feedrate.
direction required.
To restart the program:

Select AUTO mode.
“START CYCLE” to make axes return to the position they had before manual
operation.
When the axes are in position the program will restart.
If the spindles were stopped they resume now their speed
as programmed.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.4 /12

13.4.5Interrupt Over Run‐FORWARD

Object: To interrupt the program in auto cycle and RUN it FORWARD for better inspection of the part or tools and to resume the program, proceed as follows:
“STOP CYCLE”
To interrupt program execution.
Doors
Start the program forward while keeping the + (plus) button Axes move with 5% of programmed feedrate.
closed:
pressed (FORWARD function).
Doors Axes move with 5% of programmed feedrate.

Start the program forward while keeping the + (plus) and F2
open:
F2 buttons pressed simultaneously.
without the spindles and turning tools turning and with no
spraying

Speed Override.
Override.
If the spindles were stopped they resume now their speed

“START CYCLE” , to resume the program execution.
as programmed.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.4.5 /13

13.5 M150 ADJUST FEEDRATE AT 100% OF SPINDLE SPEED
e.g.: If Spindle Speed Override stands at 84% and Axis Feedrate Override at
M150: Adjust feedrate at 100% 67%, enabled M150 will set the latter also at 84%.
M151: Cancel adjust‐feedrate With enabled M150, if you change the spindle speed by pressing the keys
Plus[+] / Minus[-] pushbutton of Spindle Speed Override the axis feedrate will
also change.
M150 equalizes Axis Feedrate Override parameters with those of Spindle
Speed Override :
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 13.5 /14

14. SETTING MODE
14.1 DESCRIPTION OF SETTING MODE

Use the SETTING mode for the following only :
- changeovers 4
Δ Warning !
- checks after changeovers
SETTING Mode is strictly reserved for qualified, adequately trained per‐
sonnel. - tool/equipment changes
Δ Warning !
In SETTING mode you can work with the hatches open under certain
conditions.
Never put your hands or position other parts of your body inside the
machine. With the guards open you have no the usual protection Δ Warning !
given by the sliding or removable guards. Preferably, switch over to SETTING mode when all hatches are closed.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1 /1

14.1.1Use “SETTING” mode when the program already runs.
Location To press key Description OF actions Notes
Set Key Selector 4 (fig. above) in Control Panel to

This turns AUTO mode (production) off.
SETTING mode.
Doors
closed:

open:
spraying
Spindles OFF : Press Pushbutton [-] of SPINDLE SPEED

OVERRIDE.
Note: Opening of the doors stops the
Spindles ON : Press Pushbutton [+] of SPINDLE SPEED spindles.
OVERRIDE.
i.e. to execute a program with the closed guards (production

Turn the key back to its regular AUTO mode position
mode).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.1 /2

14.1.2Start A Program With SETTING Mode
Set Key Selector to SETTING mode.
“RESET”
“START CYCLE”
Doors
closed:

open:
spraying
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.2 /3

Spindles OFF : Press Minus[-] Pushbutton of Spindle Spindles resume now their speed as programmed.
Override.
Note: Opening of the doors stops the
Spindles ON : Press Plus[+] Pushbutton of Spindle Speed spindles.
Override. Note:
- The ”AXIS RETRACT” function can be used in ”SET‐
TING” mode but only with the doors closed.
- Please refer to chapter 12 ”AUXILIARY M FUNC‐
TIONS” for the M codes which can be programmed in
MDI with the doors open.
- Only the spindle and pickoff-spindle can be program‐
med in MDI at a maximum of 50 rpm with the doors
open.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.2 /4

14.1.3Reference An Axis In SETTING Mode

Note : Axis reference pickoff is not permitted with the doors open.
Set Key Selector to SETTING mode.
Note :
Before opening the collet make sure that the barfeeder
Select AXIS‐BY‐AXIS REFERENCE mode.
thrust is turned off or that the tube counter weight is blocked
Select the required axis with Axis / Channel Selector.

DECO 13a 226-0010: X1 - Z1 - Y1 - X2 - Y2 - X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4 - Y4
DECO 13/13a 226-0001: X1 - Z1 - Y1 - X2 - Y2 - X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4
DECO 13b/13bi: X1 - Y1 - Z1 - X2 - Y2 - Z2
DECO 7a/10a: X1 - Z1 - Y1 - X2 - Y2 - X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4
DECO 7e/10e: X1 - Z1 - Y1 - X2 - Y2 - X4 - Z4
DECO 20a/26a: X1 - Z1 - Y1 - X2 - Y2 - X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4 - Y4
DECO 20/26: X1 - Z1 - Y1 - X2 - Y2 - X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4
Open main spindle collet if Z1‐axis is selected for referencing.

Open pickoff‐spindle collet if Z4‐axis is selected for referencing.
Open pickoff‐spindle collet if Z2‐axis, for DECO 13b/bi, is selected for referencing.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.3 /5

“START CYCLE”
Hold down this button to reference the axis.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.3 /6

14.1.4Reference All Axes In SETTING Mode (Automatic Referencing)

Note : Axis reference pickoff is not permitted with the doors open.
The axes are referenced automatically in the following order:
DECO 7a/10a: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z3 - Z4 - X3 - X4
DECO 7e/10e: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z4 - X4
DECO 13/13a 226-0001 / 13a 226-0010: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z4 - Z3 - X3 - X4 - Y4
DECO 13b/13bi: X1 - Y1 - Z2 - X2 - Y2 - Z1
DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a: X1 - X2 - Y1 - Y2 - Z1 - Z3 - Z4 - X3 - X4 - Y4
Set Key Selector 4 in Control Panel to SETTING mode.
Select AUTOMATIC REFERENCE mode (for all axes)
Note :
Open main spindle collet. Before opening the collet make sure that the barfeeder
Open pickoff‐spindle collet. thrust is turned off or that the tube counter weight is blocked
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.4 /7

“START CYCLE”
Hold down this button to reference all axes.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 14.1.4 /8

15. CUSTOMER PAGES
15.1 ENABLE / DISABLE WRITE PARAMETER

Object: Permission to input system or PMC parameters
To enable WRITE parameter to enter system / PMC parameters, proceed as follows:
Press once or more times ”OFFSET SETTING” key in NC Keyboard until SETTING [HANDY] appears at the top of NC
Screen.
Position the cursor on the PARAMETER WRITE line

Enter figure 1 over the keyboard.
2 Quit CHANNEL 2 setting on Axis / Channel Selector.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.1 /1

Position the cursor on the PARAMETER WRITE line.

Enter figure 1 over NC Keyboard.
Note:
If the parameter is 1 when the machine is turned on, a System Alarm Class 2 appears: WRITE PROTECT.
- Press CAN and RESET keys in NC board together to clear the alarm.
- Proceed likewise to reset the parameter to 0.
>>>
SETTING [ HANDY ] O0002 N01254
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 ( 0 : DISABLE 1 : ENABLE )

TV CHECK = 0 ( 0 : OFF 1 : ON )
PUNCH CODE = 1 ( 0 : EIA 1 : ISO )
INPUT UNIT = 0 ( 0 : MM 1 : INCH )
I/O CHANNEL = 1 (0 - 3 : CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. = 0 ( 0 : OFF 1 : ON )
TAPE FORMAT = 0 ( 0 : NO CNV 1: F 15
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 ( PROGRAM NO. )
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 ( SEQUENCE NO. )
CONTRAST (+ = [ON:1] - = [OFF: 0])
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15 : 58 : 18 CHAN 2
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ OPRT ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.1 /2

15.2 DISABLE X3, Z3, X4, Y4 AXES AND S3‐SPINDLE

To deactivate the axes and the S3 spindle follow this sequence:
X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4 - Y4 and spindle rotation S3 for DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010
X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4 - spindle rotation S3 and the frontworks (M124 - M224 - M324) for DECO 7a/10a
X3 - Z3 - X4 - Z4 - Y4 - and spindle rotation S3 for DECO 20/26 & 20a/26a
X2 - Y2 - Z2 for DECO 13b/13bi
OR ”POS” or ”CUSTOM / GRAPH” or ”COSTUM”
(RIGHT PAGE)
(DECLAX) (DECLAX)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.2 /3

15.2.1Example for DECO 7a/10a
Note:
Reference the X3, Z3, X4, Z4 and Y4 axes before stating them INACTIVE.
If during G28‐referencing (INIT program), an axis is INACTIVE and more than 2 mm away from its reference point, Alarm 1030: G28 AND AXES NOT
REFERENCED will appear.
Move cursor to select movements to be enabled / disabled.

X3-Z3-S3 INACTIVE denotes that the X3, Z3 axes and
the S3‐spindle stand still, the frontwork
(M124,M224,M324) are disabled
X4-Z4 INACTIVE denotes that the X4, Z4 axes stand still
Note: On restarting the machine, X3 Z3 X4 Z4 axes, S3 spindle and frontwork (M124,M224,M324) are again ACTIVE.
>>>
MODE - MDI O0002 N00000
STATE AXIS
X3 - Z3 - S3 ACTIVE
X4 - Z4 ACTIVE
NUM=
MDI **** *** *** 08:32:30 CHAN 1

[ ACTIVE ] [ INACTI ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.2.1 /4

15.2.2Example for DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010, 20/26, 20a/26a.
Note:
Reference the X3, Z3, X4, Z4 and Y4 axes before stating them INACTIVE.
If during G28‐referencing (INIT program), an axis is INACTIVE and more than 2 mm away from its reference point, Alarm 1030: G28 AND AXES NOT REFER‐
ENCED will appear.
Move cursor to select active / inactive movements.

X3 - Z3 - S3 INACTIVE : X3, Z3 axes, S3‐spindle stand still.
X4 - Z4 - Y4 INACTIVE : X4, Z4, Y4 axes stand still
Note:
When you turn the machine on, X3, Z3, X4, Z4, Y4 axes and the S3‐spindle become ACTIVE.
>>>
MODE - MDI O0002 N00000

STATE AXIS
X3 - Z3 - S3 ACTIVE
X4 - Z4 - Y4 ACTIVE
FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE

100%
NUM=
MDI **** *** *** 08:32:30 CHAN 1
(ACTIVE) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.2.2 /5

15.2.3Example for DECO 13b/13bi
Note:
Reference X2 - Y2 - Z2 before disabling them.
If during G28‐referencing (INIT program), one of these axes is INACTIVE and more than 2 mm away from its reference point, Alarm 1030: G28 AND
AXES NOT REFERENCED will appear.
Move cursor to select active / inactive movements.

X2-Y2-Z2 INACTIVE denotes that the axes stand still.
Note:
On restarting the machine, X2 Y2 Z2 axes become ACTIVE.
>>>
MODE - MDI O0002 N00000
STATE AXIS
X2 - Y2 - Z2 ACTIVE
NUM=
MDI **** *** *** 08:32:30 CHAN 1
[ ACTIVE ] [ INACTI ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.2.3 /6

If however an End‐of‐Bar is sensed, the following customer page opens:

15.3 END‐OF‐BAR
MODE - MDI N01365
Object: To display End‐of‐Bar follow this sequence: O0002

END‐OF‐BAR

ACTIVE
PARTS BEFORE Not for SSF13bi

(BAR) (BAR) BAR CHANGE - 4 Not for SSF13bi
INPUT END‐OF‐BAR X....... - ACTIVE- Not for SSF13bi

In regular operation, i.e. when no End‐of‐Bar is sensed, the following
customer page opens :
AUTO - MODE O0002 N01365
END‐OF‐BAR MDI **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
INACTIVE
Notes:
END‐OF‐BAR ACTIVE indicates that input end‐of‐bar has been detected: the
INPUT END‐OF‐BAR X....... - INACTIVE- Not for SSF13bi
machine remains active until loading a new bar.
FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100% PARTS BEFORE BAR CHANGE indicates the number of parts still to be pro‐
5 0 T0000 duced before bar change. This number is loaded when an end‐of‐bar is
detected.
MDI **** *** *** 08 : 20 : 38 CHAN 1 INPUT END‐OF‐BAR permits setting of the end‐of‐bar signal.
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] For ROBOBAR SSF226 state Options: BARFEEDER and CONSTANT
THRUST.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.3 /7

MODE - MDI O0001 N00000

15.4 MACHINE NO. (ALARM 1006: WRONG MACHINE)
Object: To check if the program downloaded corresponds to the MACHINE PARAMETERS
machine concerned, follow this sequence:
MACHINE NO 61757
COOLANT MONITORING OFF
OR ”POS” or ”CUSTOM GRAPH” M894 FUNCTION OFF

M45 FUNCTION OFF
MANIPULATOR FUNCTION OFF
MANI NON SWIVEL X2.0 OFF(DECO 20/26-20a/26a)
(PAGE RIGHT) PART IN COLLET X2.2 OFF(DECO 20/26-20a/26a)

(PARAM) (PARAM) S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16 : 32 : 08 CHAN 1
Enter Machine No over NC Keyboard: [ CM ON ] [ CM OFF ] [ M8940F ] [ MANOFF ] [ M45OFF ]
e.g. : 61757
Note:
If Machine No. in the program downloaded does not correspond to Ma‐
”INPUT”. chine No. entered in this page the machine will stop on starting the
program and Alarm 1006: WRONG MACHINE will appear.
If Machine No. in the program downloaded is 0, Machine No. entered in
this page is not checked.
If Machine No. entered in this page is 0, Machine No. in the program down‐
loaded is not checked.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.4 /8

MODE - MDI O0001 N00000

15.5 Z4 OR Z2 TORQUE LIMIT AND SERVO-LAG FOR
PART‐PICKOFF
Z4 TORQUE LIMIT FOR PART‐PICKOFF
Object: To display Z4‐axis or Z2‐axis for DECO 13b/bi Torque Limit
and Servo‐Lag for part‐pickoff follow this sequence: Z4 TORQUE FOR PART PICKOFF - xx5 %
ACTUAL TORQUE OF Z4 - 100 %
Location To press key Description of actions SERVO‐LAG UNIT - 0.0001 MM
PERMISSIBLE SERVO‐LAG OF Z4 - 5000
MAXIMUM NC SERVO‐LAG OF Z4 - 90000
ACTUAL SERVO LAG OF Z4 - 0

(PAGE RIGHT) S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16 : 32 : 08 CHAN 1
[TORQUE] [ SL ]
(Z4) Example applicated to Z2.
(Z4)
(Z2) on DECO 13b/bi Explanations:
PERMISSIBLE SERVO‐LAG OF Z4 or Z2
It is an acceptable servo‐lag for part pickoff. A higher value gives an alarm.
MAX. NC SERVO‐LAG OF Z4 or Z2:
It is the max. NC servo‐lag. Value in NC parameter.
TORQUE: Press [TORQUE] to edit Z4 or Z2 torque for part pickoff
SL: Press [SL] softkey to edit permissible Z4 or Z2 Servo Lag.
Enter a value required over NC board and press INPUT key .
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.5 /9

15.6 DISPLAY PMC & CEXEC SOFTWARE NO CONFIG SYS (LOGICIEL) O0002 N02345
PAGE : 02
Object: To display system configuration page follow this sequence: SYSTEM B1D3 003
BASIC + OPTION-A1
Location To press key Description of actions SUB B1D3 003
BASIC + OPTION-A1
SERVO 9090 0005
”SYSTEM” PMC (SYS) 406A 00A1
409A 0002
PMC (LAD) V01 0003
MACRO LIB BZG2 0001
(SYSTEM) (SYSTEM) SPINDLE 1 9D00 0025
SPINDLE 2 9D00 0025
MEM **** *** *** 09 : 45 : 41 CHAN 1
Press Page UP or Page DOWN key to ( PARAM..) ( DGNOS ) ( PMC ) ( SYSTEM )
OR select Page: 02, i.e. CONFIG.SYS (LADDER) Software No is in the example: V01-0003.
(SOFTWARE)
To display CEXEC software version press Page UP or Page DOWN key to se‐
lect Page: 03 CONFIG.SYS (SOFTWARE)
CONFIG SYS (LOGICIEL) O0002 N02345
PAGE : 03
C_EX LIB BY01 2.0
C_EX APLI V01 0003
BOOT 60M3 0005
GRAPHIC_1 600W 001C
GRAPHIC_2 600W 102B
MEM **** *** *** 09 : 45 : 41 CHAN 1

( PARAM..) ( DGNOS ) ( PMC ) ( SYSTEM )
CEXEC Version No is in the example: V01-0003.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.6 /10

>>>
15.7 DISPLAY MACRO SOFTWARE NO.
Object: To display Macro Software No. follow this sequence :
(PAGE LEFT)
TORNOS
DECO 13
TORNOS SA
CH - 2740 MOUTIER
MACRO TB V01.......
MDI **** *** *** CHAN 1

( M01 ) ( STOP ) ( M20 ) ( BAR ) ( PALP )
TB Macro Software No. is V01.......
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.7 /11

LONG PARTS PER BAR:

15.8 OPERATE LONG PARTS
Number of parts made from one bar. It is updated acc. to Variable 3019 as
MAIN Program O2 runs.
Location To press key Description dof actions
See PROGRAMMING manual.
LONG PARTS COUNT:
OR ”POS” or ”CUSTOM GRAPH” Number of parts already produced. M20 or RESET in MAIN Program O2 in‐
crements the long part count.
If LONG PARTS COUNT = LONG PARTS PER BAR a new bar is automati‐
cally fed.
(BAR) (BAR)
[ C OFF ]
The page is configured in INIT Program O1, only if you program a part from To disable the counter of completed parts, stop the program in O1 and
Long Part Model. press [C OFF], e.g. for dry run (without bar).
MODE - AUTO O0002 N02745 If you machine a bar with the counter turned OFF and Alarm END‐OF‐
BAR is displayed, press RESET and START CYCLE to feed a new bar.
END‐OF‐BAR If you press RESET this will put the OFF counter to zero.
INACTIVE [ RST C ]
To ReSeT Counter press [ RST C ]
(e.g. for a complex set-up requiring many resets [due to the high number
LONG PARTS PER BAR - 4 of settings]).
LONG PARTS COUNT C- 1 When a possible number of parts per bar is reached (as a result of many
resets), the remnant is too long to be ejected.
END‐OF‐BAR INPUT X0001.7 - INACTIVE
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16:32:08 CHAN 1
[ C OFF ] [ RST C ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.8 /12

15.9 ANGULAR OFFSET OF THE SPINDLES 3 Execute the part.
To avoid changing the part program whenever an angular adjustment of

the oriented operations is made during set-up, a page is available to 4 Check the oriented operations.
allow adjusting these various angles.

Note : The angular positioning offset of the spindle (S1) is not neces‐
sary unless a shaped collet, for example square, is in the pickoff spindle.
”POS” or ”CUSTOM GRAPH”
MODE - EDIT O0000N000000

**PARTNAME=TEST13A-DEC-BROCHE
(PAGE TO RIGHT) ANGULAR OFFSET OF SPINDLES IN DEGREES
S1 AND C1 ORIENTATION 12.000

(DECBROC) POLYGONING ORIENTATION IN OP 36.0
DISPLAY G600 ORIENTATION -45.0

1 Insert the program in the machine. ORIENTATION OF PICKOFF OPERATIONS 63.0000
ORIENTATION OF POLYGONING CTR-OP 8.0
If a shaped collet, for example square,

is in the pickoff spindle, use the angular FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100%
2
positioning offset of the spindle S1 des‐
cribed in this manual. NUM =>^ S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 16:32:08 CHAN 1
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.9 /13

15.9.1Adjustment procedure
Orientation of a drilling or a C-axis operation with respect to the bar.

1
Insert the plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) offset in the S1 and C1 ORIENTATION line.
Orientation of the polygoning in the frontwork gang tools (OP).

Insert the plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) polygoning offset
in the POLYGONING ORIENTATION IN OP line.
The phase shift in degrees must be multiplied with respect to the polygoning value contained in the ”R” variable of the
2 G251 code.
Insert the plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) offset in the S1 and C1 ORIENTATION line.
Polygoning with respect to 2: G251 R2 Q0
Error measured on the part : 18°
Phase shift to be inserted: 18° * 2 = 36°
Orientation of a drilling or a C-axis operation in the backwork gang tools (CTR-OP) with respect to the bar.
3 Insert the plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) offset
In the ORIENTATION OF PICKOFF OPERATIONS line.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.9.1 /14

Orientation of the polygoning in the backwork gang tools (CTR-OP)

Insert the plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) offset
in the POLYGONING ORIENTATION IN CTR-OP line.
The phase shift in degrees must be multiplied with respect to the polygoning value contained in the R variable of the
4 G551 code.
Example :
Polygoning with respect to 2: G551 R2 Q0
Error measured on the part: 18°
Phase shift to be inserted: 18° * 2 = 36°
Display of the G600 orientation

G600 : The angular positioning offset of the spindle S1 to pick off a part.
The angular positioning offset of the spindle S1 to pick off a part is only necessary
5
if a shaped collet, for example square, is in the pickoff spindle.
If the pickoff spindle collet is not a shaped collet, type G601 in channel 1 of the MDI
to cancel the angular positioning offset of the spindle S1.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.9.1 /15

15.10 EDIT CNC TIME & DATE SETTING (TIMER) O0001 N00000
Location To press key Description of actions PARTS TOTAL = 0

PARTS REQUIRED = 0
Select MDI mode with Mode Selector. PART COUNT = 0
POWER ON = 105H 40M

Press once or more times OFFSET OPERATING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
SETTING key in NC Keyboard until
CUTTING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
SETTING page appears.
FREE PURPOSE (PMC) = 0H 0M 0S
CYCLE TIM = 0H 0M 0S
Press Page UP or Page DOWN key to DATE = 1997/03/20
OR TIME = 15:45:28
select Page: SETTING (TIMER)
MDI **** *** *** 15:45:28 CHAN 1

[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] ( ) ( ) [ OPRT ]
Press to go to the heading to edit.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.10 /16

15.11 DISPLAY CRASH PAGE (Except DECO followed by the desired value, eg
-30000 30000
7a/10a & 7e/10e)
Initial condition : SETTING MODE selected
Purpose of this procedure : “INPUT”.
Allow the operator to check the tool positions, center or operate other
manipulations.
Since the limit value is set initially to 920000, this operation will return it to
Location To press key Description of actions 620000 (= not within limit).
Note : Reminder: MDI MODE = rotation manipulation

JOG MODE = translation movement
manipulation.
Screen specific to DECO 13/13a 226-0001 & 226-0010, 13b/13bi
(PAGE TO RIGHT) press twice MODE - MDI O0001 N00000
DANGER COLLISION X4-Z4 0.0001 MM

(CRASH) (CRASH) GEOMETRIE Z T5X MAXIMUM - 300000
POSITION Z4 -DANGER 920000

_ The cursor flashes on the screen
- Enter the minus (-) sign

NUM=
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16 : 32 : 08 CHAN 1
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.11 /17

GEOMETRY Z T5X MAXIMUM : >>>

Enter the difference between your tool geometry and the maximum geometry.
This value will be included in the anti‐crash safety barrier.
Screen specific to the DECO 20/26, 20a/26a

MODE - MDI O0001 N00000
CRASH RISK X4-Z4 0.0001 MM
GEOMETRY Z T5X MAXIMUM 0
POSITION Z4 - RISK 1000000

POSITION X4 - RISK 5420000

NUM=
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16 : 32 : 08 CHAN 1
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.11 /18

15.12 PARAMETER SETTING FOR THE ETHERNET LINK Referen‐ Key to press
ON CNC FANUC 16iTB and (16iTA) ce
Note:
Enter 9 (Ethernet 16iTB)
from the soft CNC B1D4-AJ (CNC B1D5-A4 on iTA) 9 (enter 5 on Fanuc 16iTA)
15.12.1 Input/output channel selection

Description of actions ”INPUT”
ce
”RESET”
Select the MDI mode
”OFFSET SETTING”
Move the cursor to the field

”INPUT/OUTPUT MEANS”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.1 /19

Note : IP address of the DNC32 FTP server (Computer)

The transfer examples described below correspond to a standard con‐
figuration of TB_DECO such as determined at software installation.
15.12.2 Transfer by Ethernet link in direct connection (without

passing via the network)
What to do :
- Connect the computer and the machine using the cable delivered with
the machine.
- Turn on the machine.
- Turn on the computer.
- Open DNC32.
- Read the IP address defined in ”current configuration”.
- If the IP address is 169.254.149.243 enter 169.254.0.1 in the NC. The
last 2 digits are replaced by 0.1.
- To insert the IP address in the NC, see the next page.
- After having changed the IP address in the NC, turn off the machine and
then on again.
Directory in which the .trf file is stored after having clicked on £

”Transfer”. In version 6 of TB DECO, the path is C:\DECO2000
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.2 /20

15.12.3 Ethernet parameter

Note:
To change the Ethernet parameters, parameter writing must first be un‐
locked: apply the procedure described in chap. 14.1

ce
”SYSTEM”
”PAGE ON THE RIGHT” to search for

the ”ETHPRM” softkey
to access the first page of Ethernet pa‐

ETHPRM rameters The machine parameters are defined on the first page...
Enter the IP address and the sub-network mask of the CNC. This IP address
must be different than the one used for the FTP server.
( OPRT ) Reminder !
If the IP address is, for example, 169.254.149.243 insert 169.254.0.1 in the
NC. (the first 2 digits must be identical ; the last 2 are replaced by 0.1).
EMBED ...only on 16iTB Note:
The No. of IP addresses are not real examples.
position the cursor on the field to be

changed
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.3 /21


ce
Selection
Configuration of connection No1 for the FTP DNC32 server of TB-Deco:

Port number 21 port number used by the FTP DNC32 server of
TB-Deco
Keys used for editing:
IP address IP address of the FTP server enter the ad‐
dress indicated in Current configuration ”of the DNC32 ( STRING ) ( LOCK ) ( INPUT ) ( ) ( )
application. start editing character in enter
Username TORNOS user name in upper case characters lower case character
Password TORNOS user password in upper case characters

( EXIT ) ( UNLOCK ) ( INS.CH ) ( DEL.CH ) ( INPUT )
Login Dir if necessary enter the access-path to a
end editing character in enter delete enter
sub-directory containing the files to download.
upper case character character character
The download directory access-path is defined in
”current configuration” of the DNC32 application.
ce
for editing special characters:

[:] [¥] [$] [_]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.3 /22

15.12.4 Enabling the connection

ce
”PROG”
”PAGE ON THE RIGHT” to search for

the ”CONNECT” softkey
CONNECT softkey ” CONNECT”
( OPRT ) softkey ”(OPRT)”
EMBED ...only on 16iTB
CON-1 enable connection No 1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.4 /23

15.12.5 Transfer of the .trf file on the machine

What to do :
- Generate the tables.
- Open DNC32.
- Click on “Transfer”
- Activate the Server by clicking on “FTP Server Start”
- Transfer the file from the machine using the usual procedure.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.5 /24

15.12.6 DHCP / DNS option on 16iTB and (16iTA) position the cursor on the bit to be chan‐
ged
Goal: if the CNC is connected to an Ethernet network with a DHCP
server, the ” DHCP ” option is used to automatically obtain an IP
address when the machine is powered. When the DHCP option is
enabled, the parameters of the page n. 1 ”ETHERNET
ON:1 to enable
PARAMETER” are configured by the DHCP server and manual
configuration of the CNC IP address is no longer possible.
OFF:0 to disable the option
Starting condition: to enable or disable the DHCP/DNS options,
parameter writing must first be unlocked - - - >
apply the procedure described in chapter 14.1

ce
press the ”SYSTEM” key
enter the number of the parameter to

14880 find using the keyboard
softkey ”NO.SRH” to search for parame‐

NO.SRH
ter No 14880 (904 for 16iTA)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.6 /25

16iTB 16iTA
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.6 /26

Example of 14.11.2 ETHERNET PARAMETER page after automatic configur‐ >>>

ation by DHCP
This address is automatically put in the machine by the DHCP/DNS server

Note :
DNC32 must be open and FTP on ”Start”
After having connected the network cable, turn off the machine and then on
again.
Note :
If the computer is equipped with a ”Fire Wall”, deactivate it before
transferring.
15.12.7 Configuration of connection 1, 2 or 3

IP address:
Insert here the address indicated under ”Current configuration” of the
DNC 32 application.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.7 /27

15.12.8 Ethernet maintenance on 16iTB

Goal: diagnosis of errors occurring during an Ethernet connection

ce
press the ”SYSTEM” key
search for the softkey ”ETHMNT”
ETHMNT
EMBED ...only on 16iTB
to access different Ethernet maintenan‐

ce screens
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.8 /28

Goal: to display the Ethernet log file >>>

ce
press the “MESSAGE” key
press the “PAGE à DROITE” key
ETHLOG press the sofkey “ETHLOG”
EMBEDD ...only on 16iTB
to display the Ethernet log file
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.8 /29

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 15.12.8 /30

16. OPTIONS
16.1 ORIENTED S1 / S4 OR S2 SPINDLE LOCKING CONTROL POUR DECO
Note : In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, the mechanical locking S1 or S4 or S2 (13bi) is not permitted.
S1 and S2 --> DECO 13b/13bi --> code M103 and M203 Explanations :
S1 and S4 --> DECO 7a/10a 13/13a 226-0001 Block 5 : Disengage spindle over M800 function.
13a 226-0010 / 20/26 / 20a/26a --> code M103 and M403 P1=-1700 for S1
P1=-1703 for S4 or S2
The control program for mechanical locking in position of the main (S1) or
pickoff (S4) spindle after an oriented stop consists of three sequences : Block 6 / 9 : M831/M832 = Lock / unlock S1
M841/M842 = Lock / unlock S4
1) Stop / orient spindle over M119 Q.. as required...
Block 7 / 10 : obligatory dwell of 0.5 s to give the lock time to get into position.
2) Cut the servo‐system of S1 or S4 motor over M800 P1=-.... function
before locking.
3) Lock over M function.
Note :
Example of the oriented S1 / S4 stop at 0 degrees : To enable : - M831 / M832 activate KEEPRELAY K10.0 =1
ISO CODE FOR POSITIONED S1 / S4 SPINDLE LOCKING / - M841 / M842 activate KEEPRELAY K10.1 =1
UNLOCKING CONTROL With Software: PMC P13V 1- 05.mem you can check that S1/S4
Block ISO code for S1 ISO code for S4 spindles stop before their locking and and that they unlock before rota‐
tion.
1 M103 S0 M403 S0
2 G4 X0.9 G4 X0.9 Activate :
- KEEPRELAY K3.6 =1 to enable S1 check;
3 M119 Q0 M419 Q0 - KEEPRELAY K3.7 =1 to enable S4 check.
4 G4 X0.7 G4 X0.7
Alarm 1045 : M831 AND S1 NOT EQUAL TO 0, M841 AND S4 NOT
5 M800 P1=-1700 M800 P1=-1703 EQUAL TO 0 appears if the spindles still rotate when locking / unlock‐
6 M831 M841 ing (M831 / M841) is instructed or if rotation is instructed while they are
7 G4 X0.5 G4 X0.5 still locked.
8 machining machining
9 M832 M842
10 G4 X0.5 G4 X0.5
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.1 /1

16.2 EXTERNAL THREAD WHIRLING SPINDLE FOR Location To press key Description of actions
DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e
Notes : In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, the ”exter‐ Turn the whirling spindle ON
nal turbine” spindle starting is not permitted. Enter code M604
The potentiometer on the control panel (shown below) sets the whirling
attachment speed from 0 to 8000 rpm.
The figure 800 on the potentiometer, as shown, corresponds to motor's Press these keys.
8000 rpm. To turn the whirling spindle ON :
Speed displayed = 8000 rpm on the whirling machine
Turn the whirling spindle OFF
Enter code M605
Presser successivement ces 3 touches.

To turn the whirling spindle OFF :
Whirling spindle MDI control interim stop and restarting

To stop the whirling spindle
Head lock clamp
Press Minus [-] Spindle Speed Override
. Attention !
Button.
The maximum rotation speed is 8000 rpm.
So you must not exceed the value of 8 0 0 on the display. To restart the whirling spindle :
Location To press key Description of actions Press Plus [+] Spindle Speed Override
Button.
Select MDI mode with Mode Selector. Or
“START CYCLE”
Select CHANNEL 2 with Axis / Channel
2 Selector.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.2 /2

Whirling spindle control in AUTO interim stop and restarting >>>
To stop the whirling spindle :

”STOP CYCLE”.
to interrupt program execution.
Press Minus [-] Spindle Speed Override

Button.
To restart the whirling spindle :
Press Plus [+] Spindle Speed Override
Button.
Or
“START CYCLE”
. Attention !
When the whirling motor is discon‐
nected :
- Do not switch it on.
- Put the protecting lid on the socket.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.2 /3

16.3 PART MANIPULATOR MDI CONTROL DECO 7a/10a - 7e/10e

Note :
The MDI mode with its ISO code is in no way related to the AUTO (MEM) mode with its TABLE operation, which is to say the MDI mode operates differ‐
ently.
Note :
In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, only the collet opening and closing is permitted.
The other part manipulator movements are not permitted.
1) M160 Advance manipulator

2) M162 Swing manipulator out Note :
In 2) The manipulator will only swivel outwards if M160 is
entered.
In 2) the arm will only swivel if the manipulator arm collet
is open M165
4) M163 Swing manipulator in
5) M161 Retract manipulator Note :
In 5) The manipulator will refuse to return unless M163 is
entered.
6) M165 Open manipulator gripper
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.3 /4

16.3.1Disable Part Gripper (“Manipulator”) Function DECO

7a/10a-7e/10e AUTO - MODE O0002 N01234
To start with : You must be in AUTO mode, Program INIT (O01) MACHINE PARAMETERS
Location To press key Description of actions MACHINE NO. 60888
“STOP CYCLE” M894 FUNCTION OFF
M45 FUNCTION OFF
OR “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH” PART IN COLLET X2.2 OFF(DECO 20/26-20a/26a)

NUM=
(PAGE RIGHT)
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 13 : 09 CHAN 1
[ CM ON ] [ CM OFF ] [ M894OF ] [ MANOFF ] ( M45OFF )
(PARAM) (PARAM)
[MANOFF] (MANOFF)
Note :
The (MAN OFF) function deletes:
M160 / M161 Advance / retract manipulator arm or,
M160 / M161 Advance / retract sorter
M162 / 163 Swivel / swivel return manipulator arm
M164 / M165 Close / open collet manipulator arm.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.3.1 /5

16.4 PART GRIPPER MDI CONTROL DECO 13/13a 226-0001 / 13a 226-0010
Note :
The MDI mode with its ISO code is in no way related to the AUTO (MEM) mode with its TABLE operation, which is to say the MDI mode operates differently.
Note :
1) M160 Feed part catcher chute

2) M164 Close part gripper
3) M169 Check part presence in manipulator. The part gripper can be disabled under the conditions below:
Part absence releases Class 3 Alarm 1032: PART IN - In AUTO mode in “INIT” program (O01) press key “CYCLE
MANIPULATOR and stops the machine immediately. STOP” and then softkey “MANOFF”.
- After a “RESET” the functions of manipulator are enabled
again.
4) M165 Open part gripper
5) M161 Retract part catcher chute
6) M168 Check part absence in manipulator. Part absence releases Class 3 Alarm 1033: PART NOT IN
MANIPULATOR and stops the machine immediately.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.4 /6

16.4.1Disable Part Gripper (“Manipulator”) Function

To start with : You must be in AUTO mode, Program INIT (O01)

MACHINE PARAMETERS
MACHINE NO. 60888
“STOP CYCLE”
M894 FUNCTION OFF
“POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH” NUM=
OR
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 13 : 09 CHAN 1
[ CM ON ] [ CM OFF ] [ M894OF ] [ MANOFF ]
(PAGE RIGHT)
(PARAM) (PARAM)
[MANOFF] (MANOFF)
Note:
Whenever you press RESET, the part gripper (manipulator)
function is reenabled.
The disable part gripper (“manipulator”) function MAN(IPU‐
LATEUR) OFF disables also :
M160 Advance part catcher
M164 Close part gripper
M168 Check part absence in gripper
M169 Check part presence in gripper
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.4.1 /7

16.5 PART MANIPULATOR MDI CONTROL DECO 20/26 / 20a/26a

Note :
The MDI mode with its ISO code is in no way related to the AUTO (MEM) mode with its TABLE operation, which is to say the MDI mode operates differ‐
ently.
Note :
2 Selecct channel 1 with Axis / Channel Selector.
DECO 20a/26a

2) M162 manipulator will not swing out (M162) without
M160 entered first.
3) M164 Close manipulator gripper(‐holder)
4) M163 Retour pivotement bras manipulateur
5) M161 manipulator will not retract (M161) without M163
entered first.
6) M165 Open manipulator gripper(‐holder)
7) M168 Check part absence in manipulator jaws / cage
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.5 /8

8) M169 Check part presence in manipulator jaws / cage 8) M168 controls jaws or cage as applicable, the sensing states
being :
0 for jaws
1 for cage
Therefore enter over MDI :
D450.0 with 1 for jaws
D450.0 with 0 for cage
The D450.0 will retain the jaws or cage state (as entered) when
the machine is switched off.
The control can be disabled by activating the following
keep‐relays :
K8.0 = 1 disables X2.0 manipulator control
(manipulator not swung out)
K8.1 = 1 disables X2.2 manipulator control
(part in jaws or cage closed)
DECO 20/26

2) M162 manipulator will not swing out (M162) without
M160 entered first.
3) M164 Close manipulator gripper(‐holder)
4) M163 Swing manipulator in
5) M161 manipulator will not retract (M161) without M163
entered first.
6) M165 Open manipulator gripper(‐holder)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.5 /9

7) M166 Advance manipulator to guidebush

8) M167 Retract manipulator to backwork gang
9) M168 Check part absence in manipulator jaws / cage
10) M169 Check part presence in manipulator jaws / cage Note :
10) M168 controls jaws or cage as applicable, the sens‐
ing states being :
0 for jaws
1 for cage
Therefore enter over MDI :
D450.0 with 1 for jaws
D450.0 with 0 for cage
The D450.0 will retain the jaws or cage state (as entered)
when the machine is switched off.
The control can be disabled by activating the follow‐
ing keep‐relays :
K8.0 = 1 disables X2.0 manipulator control (manipulator
not swung out)
K8.1 = 1 disables X2.2 manipulator control (part in jaws
or cage closed)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.5 /10

16.5.1Fitting Manipulator Jaws / Cage and Sensor SENSOR OPERATION DIAGRAM FOR CAGE AND JAWS
Note : Sensor location varies to conform to jaws or cage.
0 1 1 Sensor Status
What to do ? Notes Part
CAGE
Fitting Jaws & Sensor
- Fit the peg and the jaws on the See drawing opposite.
gripper(‐holder) arm(s).
0 1 0 Sensor Status
- Fit the sensor support and the
sensor on the gripper(‐holder).
Part
JAWS
- Adjust the sensor ... ... by shiftiing its support.
Sensor indications : Jaws open → Sensor LED off
Jaws closed → Sensor LED on
(with part)
Jaws closed → Sensor LED off
(without part)
Fitting Cage & Sensor
- Take down the peg, the jaws, the
sensor support and the sensor
from the gripper(‐holder) ... ... if these are already mounted.
- Fit the cage.
- Screw in the sensor in the M8x1
hole.
Sensor indications : Cage open → Sensor LED off
Cage closed → Sensor LED on
(with & without part)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.5.1 /11

16.5.2Device for Monitoring Part Presence in Manipulator Jaws M168 Check part absence in jaws
G912 [feeding]
Permanent monitoring
M169 Check part presence in jaws

G923 [part pickup]
16.5.3Alarm 2032: FAULT MANIPULATOR

If the monitoring system gives this alarm, proceed as follows :
Causes :
- Manipulator not swung out
- Part absence
Eliminate the fault(s)

and press F3 to clear the alarm.
F3 (F3 pushbutton on Control
Panel AR90)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.5.3 /12


16.5.4Disable Part Gripper (“Manipulator”) Function
To start with :
MACHINE PARAMETERS
You must be in AUTO mode, Program INIT (O01),
Press CYCLE STOP to interrupt program run, then the key soft (MAN‐ MACHINE NO 0
OFF).
Whenever you press RESET, the part gripper (manipulator) function is
reenabled. FUNCTION M894 OFF
FUNCTION M45 OFF
Location To press key Description of actions MANIPULATOR FUNCTION OFF
“POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH” PART IN COLLET X2.2 OFF(DECO 20/26-20a/26a)

OR
NUM=
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 13 : 09 CHAN 1
(PAGE RIGHT) ( ARRON ) ( ARROFF ) ( M894OF ) ( MANOFF ) ( M45OFF )
(PARAM) (PARAM)
[MANOFF] (MANOFF)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.5.4 /13

16.6 SENSOR MDI CONTROL
Sensor 1 - when active, changes states from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0

Sensor control according the sensor type used.
Location To press key Description of actions Sensor 2 - when active, changes states from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0
according the sensor type used.

Sensor 3 - when active, changes states from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0
according the sensor type used.
(SENS) (SENS)
MODE - MDI O0001 N00000
SENSOR
SENSOR 1 - 0
SENSOR 2 - 0
SENSOR 3 - 0

5 0 T0000
MDI **** ** *** 10 : 25 : 37 CHAN 1
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.6 /14

16.6.1M‐Codes for Laser Sensor MDI Control
Code Channel Function (sensor type “LASER”)

Enable tool breakage check with Sensor 1.
M32 1
If no tool is sensed, Alarm TOOL BREAKAGE SENSOR 1 is displayed.
Enable part presence check with Sensor 1.
M33 1
If no tool is sensed, Alarm PART PRESENCE SENSOR 1 is displayed.
M34 1
M35 1
M36 1
M37 1
M880* 1 Air Blast ON, LASER Sensor 1
M881 1 Air Blast OFF, LASER Sensor 1
Note : * In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, the ”LASER” feeler air (M880 - M882 - M884) starting is not permitted.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.6.1 /15

Sample Sequence for Setting Laser Sensor 1

Note : The MDI mode with its ISO code is in no way related to the AUTO (MEM) mode with its TABLE operation, which is to say the MDI mode operates
differently.
Enter code
M 880 M880 to turn air blast on for Sensor 1 and press INPUT.
G04 X2 G04 X2 for 2 s dwell and press INPUT.
M 32 M32 to enable tool breakage check with Sensor 1 and press INPUT.
M 881 M881 to turn air blast on for Sensor 1.
“START CYCLE”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.6.1 /16

16.6.2M‐Codes for Mechanical Sensor MDI Control
Code Channel Function (sensor type “LASER”)

M32 1
M33 1
M34 1
M35 1
M36 1
M37 1
16.7 MDI CONTROL FOR PICKOFF SPINDLE'S THRU‐COOLANT FLUSHING
Notes: In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, the CLEANING/SPRAYING VIA PICKOFF_SPINDLE starting is not permitted.
M886 : enables
disables in 2 seconds
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.7 /17

16.8 ADDITIONAL M‐FUNCTIONS FOR MDI
Note : In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, these functions are not permitted
M831 : enables Output Y4.3 (M831 activ if option declared)

M832: disables Output Y4.3 M889 : enables Output Y5.6 (M889 activ if option M851 not declared)
disables Output Y5.6 in 2 seconds
M842: disables Output Y4.1 M890 : enables Output Y5.4
M891 : disables Output Y5.4
M852: disables Output Y5.6 M892 : enables Output Y5.2
M887 : enables Output Y4.3 (M887 activ if option M831 not declared)
disables Output Y4.3 in 2 seconds M894 : enables Output Y5.0
M888 : enables Output Y4.1 (M888 activ if option M841 not declared)
disables Output Y4.1 in 2 seconds
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.8 /18

16.9 DEEP DRILLING CONTROL

Note:
. Attention !
In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open,
Some drilling operations may require a reduced potentiometer setting:
the deep drilling pump starting is not permitted.
To be sure, check the drill's operating pressure in the manufacturer's
The doors opening causes the deep drilling pump to stop.
specifications.
DEEP DRILLING TABLE Δ Warning !
Potentiome‐ Frequency Speed Flowrate Drilling Dia. The table opposite gives a general guideline for your different deep dril‐
ter Display [Hz] [rpm] [l/min] [mm] lings. You can deviate from these figures within certain acceptable
000 000 000 00.0 00.0 limits, e.g.:
050 010 140 01.4 01.5
100 020 280 02.8 02.0
Acceptable ? Potentiometer Display Drilling ∅ [mm]
150 030 420 04.2 02.5
200 040 560 05.6 03.5 Accepted 120 2
250 050 700 07.0 05.0
Not accepted 800 6
300 060 840 08.4 06.0
350 070 980 09.8 06.5
400 080 1120 11.2 07.5
Note :
450 090 1260 12.6 08.0
When you overshoot the limits of the frequency converter, it will give an
500 100 1400 14.0 08.5 alarm (Alarms 07 07, 07 20).
550 110 1540 15.4 09.0 Any of these alarms indicates that you have exceeded the operating
600 120 1680 16.8 09.5 limits of the deep drilling attachment and that you have to reduce the
650 130 1820 18.2 10.0 rpm setting on the converter now.
If a value of drilling differs considerably from the potentiometer display
700 140 1960 19.6 10.5
the alarm can also occur.
750 150 2100 21.0 11.0
800 160 2240 22.4 11.5
850 170 2380 23.8 12.0 M894 Deep drilling On
900 180 2520 25.2 12.5
M895 Deep drilling Off
950 190 2660 26.6 13.0
000 200 2800 28.0 13.5 Oil level & pressure check : If low, an alarm is given:
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.9 /19

Alarm 1035 FAULT DEEP DRILLING PUMP is given Location To press key Description of actions
(for alarm delay, see below)
Priming duration : Time for motor‐pump unit to reach the required
speed (acceleration ramp)
+ Time for oil to pass and raise pressure (M894OF) (M894OF)
The priming duration varies acc. to drilling
operation.
Timer T52 function : adjusting priming duration;
delaying monitoring to avoid a premature alarm.
MACHINE PARAMETERS
16.9.1Disable M894 Deep Drilling Function
To start with: You must be in AUTO mode, Program INIT (O01). MACHINE NO 0
Press CYCLE STOP to interrupt program run and then softkey COOLANT MONITORING OFF
“M894OF”.
FUNCTION M894 OFF
Note : FUNCTION M45 OFF
Whenever you press RESET, the M984‐function is re‐enabled.
PART IN COLLET X2.2 OFF(DECO 20/26-20a/26a)
OR “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH” FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100%

NUM=
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 13 : 09 CHAN 1
( ARRON ) ( ARROFF ) ( M894OF ) ( MANOFF ) ( M45OFF )
(PAGE RIGHT)
(PARAM) (PARAM)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.9.1 /20

16.10 15 OR 20 BAR PUMP CONTROL Location To press key Description of actions
Note:
In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, OR “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH”
the 15 or 20 bar pump starting is not permitted.
The doors opening causes the 15 or 20 bar pump to stop.
In AUTO mode : (PAGE RIGHT)

ON : with CM ON (Coolant On) and M45 (HP pump On).
OFF : with M46 (HP pump Off) or with CM OFF (Coolant Off) or CYCLE STOP
(PARAM) (PARAM)
or SETTING mode.
in MDI mode :
ON : with CM ON (Coolant On) and M45 (HP pump On) in Channel 1. (M45OFF) (M45OFF)
OFF : with M46 (HP pump Off) in Channel 1 or CM OFF (Coolant Off).
Under certain circumstances you can disable M45 function
In AUTO mode in INIT program (O01) press CYCLE STOP to interrupt pro‐ MACHINE PARAMETERS
gram run and then softkey “M45OFF”.
Whenever you press RESET, the M45‐function is re‐enabled. MACHINE NO 0
FUNCTION M894 OFF

FUNCTION M45 OFF
PART IN COLLET X2.2 OFF(DECO 20/26-20a/26a)

NUM=
MEM **** *** *** 08 : 13 : 09 CHAN 1
( ARRON ) ( ARROFF ) ( M894OF ) ( MANOFF ) ( M45OFF )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.10 /21


16.11 PARTS SELECTOR FOR DECO 7a/10a-7e/10e / 13/
13a 226-0001 & 13a 226-0010
PARTS SELECTOR
To change the parts recuperation container when a specified number of
parts have been completed
OR NUMBER OF PARTS PER CONTAINER - 1000
to change the parts recuperation container when a specified number of
bars have been machined, follow this sequence : NUMBER OF BARS PER CONTAINER - 76
Repère Touche à presser Description des actions DELAY IN SECONDS OF ROTATION OF TRAY: 1

OR “POS” or “CUSTOM GRAPH” NUM=
MDI **** *** *** 08:32:30 CHAN 1
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Press 2x the softkey(PAGE RIGHT), Press the cursor to move onto the NUMBER OF PARTS PER CONTAINER
or NUMBER OF BARS PER CONTAINER lines. Enter over NC the number
of parts or bars to machine. Press to “INPUT”.
Press this softkey at the bottom of NC DELAY IN SECONDS OF ROTATION OF TRAY: allows the rotation of the tray
(SE.PCE) to be delayed. The default value is 1 second.
Screen to display.
Note :
The usual case is to enter just one figure either for the NUMBER OF
PARTS PER CONTAINER or the NUMBER OF BARS PER CONTAINER.
If two figures for both are entered, it is the first number arrived at which will
activate the container selection.
If you enter a zero, no container will be selected.
You can enter 1 to 99999999 for the NUMBER OF PARTS PER CON‐
TAINER and for the NUMBER OF BARS PER CONTAINER.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.11 /22

16.12 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
Note:
Press the DOWN cursor key for insert the
State the tool life management option to be able to use it.
next number of tool to check.
Press the RIGHT cursor key to pre-select

16.12.1 Inputting tool wear variables the number of parts before the machine
Inputting tool wear variables allows the operator to be informed when a shuts down.
tool needs to be changed. Use the NC keyboard to input the desired
The number of parts pre-selected by the operator causes the machine number of parts
to shut down at the end of the cycle. Press the “INPUT” key.
Sequence What to do? Press the LEFT cursor key to select the
number of parts before the machine shuts
down at the end of the cycle.
OR Press the softkey “POS” or “CUSTOM”
Use the NC keyboard to input the desired
number of parts
Press 2x the softkey PAGE RIGHT at the Press the “INPUT” key.
bottom of NC screen.
Info:
Press the softkey TOOLMN at the bottom The operator will be informed that a tool needs to be changed by
(TOOLMN) means of a message and by an orange lamp flashing.
of NC screen.
(TOOLS) Press the softkey TOOLS at the bottom of

NC screen.
Press the “PAGE UP” or “PAGEDOWN”
key to select the page for the desired tool.
(Page 1/2 to 2/2)
Press the DOWN cursor key until you are

positioned on the line for the worn tool
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.12.1 /23

16.12.2 TO DISPLAY THE ABBREVIATIONS

MDI - MODE 1-2 O00002 N 1234 Sequence What to do?
TOOL VALUES (HELP) Press the softkey HELP at the bottom of

NC screen.
TOOL PTO PREM PCNT PMS
Txx T 1000 0 G
Txx 1000 2500 0 50
Txx 2500 1800 0 50 TOOL TOOL NO.
Txx 1800 2400 0 50
Txx 2400 1000 0 50
Txx 1000 4000 0 50 PTOT PARTS TOTAL TO BE PRODUCED BEFORE MACHINE
Txx 4000 2200 0 50 STOP.
Txx 2200 950 0 50
950 50
NUM= T0000 PREM NUMBER OF PARTS REMAINING TO BE PRODUCED
BEFORE MACHINE STOP.
MDI **** *** *** 11:00:00 CHAN1
[TOOL-C] [ ] [IN-OUT] [CLEAR] [HELP]
PCNT PART COUNT: NUMBER OF PARTS ALREADY PRODUCED.
PMSG NUMBER OF PARTS BEFORE THE MACHINE STOPS

AND A MESSAGE DEMANDS TOOL CHANGE.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.12.2 /24

16.12.3 Changing a tool Notes:

TOOL-C zeroes the parts machined counter on the line where the
The following sequences allow a tool to be changed when a “XX TOOL cursor is located.
WORN” message appears on screen. Tool wear values are retained once input.
Initial conditions: Press the TOOL-C soft key at the bottom
A “XX TOOL WORN” message appears on screen. of the NC screen.
If production is not at a halt, stop the programme at the end of the cycle. (TOOL-C)
Repeat this operation if other tool wear
Sequence What to do? messages are displayed.
OR Press the softkey “POS” or the softkey

Restart the programme.
“CUSTOM”.
Press 2x the softkey PAGE RIGHT at the

MDI - MODE 1-2 O00002 N 1234
(TOOLMN) Press the softkey TOOLMN at the bottom TOOL VALUES

of NC screen.
Press the softkey TOOLS at the bottom of TOOL PTO PREM PCNT PMS
(TOOLS)
NC screen. Txx T 0 0 G
Txx 0 0 0 0
Press the “PAGE UP” or “PAGEDOWN” Txx 0 95 905 0
key to select the page for the desired tool. Txx 1000 0 0 100
(Page 1/2 to 2/2) Txx 0 0 0 0
Txx 0 0 0 0
Press the DOWN cursor key until you are Txx 0 0 0 0
positioned on the line for the worn tool Txx 0 0 0 0
0 0
NUM= T0000
MDI **** *** *** 11:00:00 CHAN1
[TOOL-C] [ ] [IN-OUT] [CLEAR [HELP]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.12.3 /25

16.12.4 Initialising tool variables

O00002 N 1234
ZEROING ALL TOOL WEAR DATA
Sequence What to do?
TOOL MANAGEMENT
DO YOU REALLY WANT TO INITIALIZE ALL?

OR Press the softkey “POS” or “CUSTOM”
ATTENTION: ALL DATA REFERRING

Press 2x the softkey PAGE RIGHT at the TO TOOL MANAGEMENT
bottom of NC screen. WILL BE ERASED!
Press the softkey TOOLMN at the bottom

(TOOLMN)
of NC screen.
Press the softkey TOOLS at the bottom of
(TOOLS)
NC screen. MDI **** *** *** 11:00:00 CHAN1
Press the softkey CLEAR at the bottom of [YES] [NO] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(CLEAR)
NC screen.
Press the softkey YES at the bottom of NC
screen.
(YES) . All data are now irretrievably erased!
(Excepted the tool numbers.)
OR
Press the NO soft key at the bottom of the
(NO)
NC screen to exit the menu.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.12.4 /26

16.12.5 RS 232 inputting / outputting of tool wear variables Press the PUNCH soft key at the bottom
(PUNCH) of the NC screen to output the variables to
Info: a file may be associated with each part. a peripheral.
Initial conditions:
Bringing the peripheral on-line
Programme halted
Compatible peripheral (4800 bauds, 2 stop bits, no parity, ISO) Press the EXEC soft key to start transmit‐
Cable connected to the RS 232 connector (EXEC)
ting the variables.
Sequence What to do? If the transmission has been successful, the message
”NORMAL END” is displayed on screen.
OR Press the softkey “POS” or “CUSTOM”.
Press 2x the softkey PAGE RIGHT at the

O00002 N 1234
Press the softkey TOOLMN at the bottom

IN-OUT VARIABLES
(TOOLMN)
of NC screen.
READ DOWNLOAD TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
Press the softkey TOOLS at the bottom of
(TOOLS) OVER RS 232 SOCKET
NC screen.
Press the softkey CLEAR at the bottom of PUNCH UPLOAD TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
(CLEAR)
NC screen. OVER RS 232 SOCKET
Press the softkey IN-OUT at the bottom of
(IN-OUT)
NC screen.
Press the READ soft key at the bottom of
the NC screen to input the variables into
(READ) the CNC. MDI **** *** *** 11:00:00 CHAN1
OR [READ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ] [ ]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.12.5 /27

16.13 AUTOMATIC PREHEATING OF THE MACHINE During preheating of the machine
AIM: - The part counters are disabled.

To give the user the possibility of starting the machine in automatic pre‐
heating mode. with a date and time established beforehand by the user. - The part sensors are disabled.
- Monitoring for the presence or absence of a part after part ejection is dis‐
abled.
Principle
- The oil high pressure units are shut off.
When the preheating function is enabled, the machine can behave in two
ways when it is started up : - Main spindle collet openings are cancelled.
- Movements of axis Z1 are cancelled.
If « AUTO » mode has been selected for preheating, the machine starts up - The chip conveyor is shut off.
normally and machines the material. - The cup part selector is shut off.
The machine continues normally until the number of parts to machine is - The 20 bar pump is shut off.
reached, at that point the machine stops and goes into standby mode.
When the programmed time and date are reached, the machine starts the part
programme in preheating.
If “MANUAL” mode has been selected for preheating, the machine starts up
directly
in preheating mode, regardless of the number of parts still to machine.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.13 /28

16.13.1 Starting up the « manual preheating” function - Machine stopped

- Machine stopped - RESET
- RESET - Position the bar for the first cut.
- Position the bar for the first cut. - Enter the number of parts to machine in the part counter before putting the
machine on standby.
- Enter the spindle speed as a % of the programmed speed. (From 25% to
100%) - Enter the date day / month (DD / MM) => Optional
- During deep drilling if the barfeeder pusher is outside the oil area there is - Enter the time hour / minutes (HH :MM) => Mandatory
a risk of overheating the revolving end piece and thus the need to - Enter the spindle speed as a % of the programmed speed. (From 25% to
decrease the spindle rotation speed. 100%)
- Select « MANUAL » - During deep drilling if the barfeeder pusher is outside the oil area there
- Press the F1 key (F1 lit). is a risk of overheating the revolving end piece and thus the need to
decrease the spindle rotation speed.
- CYCLE START
- Select ”AUTO”
- Press the F1 key (F1 lit)
16.13.2 Starting up the “automatic preheating” function
- CYCLE START
The operator must make sure that the material remaining in the barfeeder
makes it possible to machine the number of parts that he has entered in the
part counter. 16.13.3 Shutting off the « automatic preheating” function
The CN clock is used to start the machine in preheating mode - - Stop the machine
The CN date and time must be correct. - - RESET
The time, date, operating mode and spindle speed must be introduced - - Disengage the cutoff tool
before starting in preheating mode (F1 lit). - - Move the bar in front of the cutoff tool
If the date is omitted the preheating time is valid every day. - - Press the F1 key (F1 off).
Set : DATE ( JJ / MM ) : 00 / 00 to disable the date.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.13.3 /29

16.13.4 Data entry Sequence What to do?

Sequence What to do? Press the soft ”PRECHA” key at the bot‐
PRECHA
tom of the CN screen.
Press the ”POS” key.
** PARTNAME – NEW PART

Press the soft ”M20” key at the bottom of
M20
the CN screen. PREHEATING MODE
F1 ACTIVATION OF PREHEATING MODE
MODE – AUTO O0001 N000000 DATE ( JJ / MM ) ( DAY / MONTH ) : 09 / 10
** PARTNAME – NEW PART TIME ( HH : MN ) ( HOUR / MINUTES ) : 06 : 30
SPINDLE OVERRIDE : 25%
NUMBER OF PARTS TO MACHINE - 125 MODE ( AUTO / MANUAL ) : AUTO
PARTS MACHINED - 106 FEED OVE 100% SPIND OVE 100%

S 0 T00000
TOTAL NUMBER OF PARTS - 2400 MEM **** *** *** 11 : 20 : 34 CHAN 1
( M20 ) ( ) ( AUTO ) ( MANUAL ) ( )

S 0 T00000
MEM **** *** *** 11 : 20 : 34 CHAN 1
( PTOTAL ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( PRECHA )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.13.4 /30

16.13.5 Changing the time and date 0n the CNC. >>>
Sequence What to do ?
Select the ”MDI” mode on the CNC.
Press the ”OFFSET SETTING” key on the

CNC until the selection of the « SET‐
TINGS » page.
Select the ”TIME COUNTER SETTING”

page.
Select the item to change.
REGLAGE (TME COUNTER) O0001 N00000
TOTAL PARTS = 0
PARTS REQUIRED = 0
PARTS MACHINED = 0
TIME POWERED = 105H 40M

OPERATING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
PROCESSING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
TIME COUNTER (PMC) = 0H 0M 0S
CYCLE TIME = 0H 0M 0S
DATE = 2005/11/20
TIME = 15:45:28
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:45:28 CHAN 1
( COMP ) ( SETTING ) ( ) ( ) ( OPRT )
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.13.5 /31

16.14 MultiProgram
Note: This function is available on DECO 7a , 10a, 13a, 20a, 26a with NC Fanuc 16i-TA and Fanuc 16iTB and only with an SBF 216 or SBF532 feeder.
Objective and limitations: Designed to run up to 8 different part programs in sequence using the same tools and so operating with the same shared tool
catalogue.
A special LOOP function allows you to repeat this chain of machining programs infinitely.
These programs must be located on an Ethernet network or memory card (MemoryCard PCMCIA).
Each program is associated with a number of parts to be machined.
There are up to 8 different programs but the operator must limit this number to 6 for understandable reasons, if the machine
uses a 6-position cup collecting device.
The selected program names must exist on the server or memory card or the MultiProgram function will stop if it does not find
the requested program. A test function can be enabled to check for the presence of programs on the server or Memory Card.
A series of messages and alarms guide or inform the operator during data entry and when the MultiProgram function is ON
as well as during TEST mode.
On completion of the list of part programs, the machine awaits pre-heating.
When the “part program” files are downloaded via the Ethernet network, the “FTP active communication” communication
protocol is used.
The part program files are TB-DECO ADV files with the file extension: ”.trf”
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14 /32

A program can feature up to 20 characters, without the extension (.TRF). The MultiProgram function automatically adds on
the extension (.TRF).
The characters permitted are ”1-9”, ”A-Z”, hyphen ”-” and full stop ”.”. No lower case characters.
The maximum number of digits in the part number is 8.
The last part in each part program (series) will not be backwork machined. Were machining necessary, this part would be lost.
The backwork part pickoff is necessary to eject the last part of each batch and the part is ejected into the chips.
Should the part pickoff not be available, the part will be ejected normally.
The cup collecting device, where featured, is picked up. Each time the part program changes, the cup collecting device
changes cup.
Δ Attention!
The mechanical and machining compatibility between part programs to be run is under no circumstances checked by this function.
This is the sole responsibility of the customer!!! This clearly means that the risk of collision is not controlled by this function. The cus‐
tomer must make sure the running of the series of programs and the machining involved in these programs will not lead to any
collisions between machines, materials or tools.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14 /33

16.14.1 Access to the MultiProgram function page The following page should be displayed:
Goal: Accessing the control screen

OFFSET 01 AXIS X1 METRIC PAGE 1/1
Item Key to press Description of actions
No TOOL WEAR ∅
”RESET” 01 T11 0
02 T12 0
03 T13 0
04 T14 0
05 T15 0
06 T16 0
2 Select channel 1
>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 12:26:21 CHAN1
(AXISRH) (INPUT) (INPUT+) ( + ) ( - )
Select ”EDIT” mode
If this page is not displayed the first time,

(OFFSET) press the <OFFSET> softkey that appears
”Offsets”
at the bottom left of the screen.
Then press the right arrow key under the
screen repeatedly.
... until the Multi Program page is displayed...
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.1 /34

MULTI PROGRAM 16.14.2 Data entry mode

FROM : ETHERNET Goal: Entering data in the table
SEQ FILE NAME PARTS
Item Key to press Description of actions
1 0
2 0 Select the MDI mode.
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
Select the field to be edited.
7 0
8 0
Select MDI to modify arrays...
>_ LOOP 000000 / 000000
EDIT **** *** *** *** 12:26:21 CHAN1 Depending on the arrow you have pressed, a field is displayed in reverse
video. The data can now be entered.
( ON ) (PROG +) (PROG -) ( TEST ) ( LOOP )
All data entered is displayed on the display line preceded by: >_
Confirm entry by pressing the <INPUT> key
Enter the machining program names with their associated part number in the
different positions from 1 - 8.
It is not necessary to enter the extension (.TRF).
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.2 /35

It is not necessary to fill in all positions. A line may remain empty. The MultiPro‐
gram function will simply ignore that line. Example of a page with data entered successfully...
A line featuring a program name with a series of parts equal to 0 will be
ignored.
A line featuring a series of parts stated without the name of the program will
MULTI PROGRAM
be ignored. FROM : ETHERNET
SEQ FILE NAME PARTS
The characters permitted for the program name entry are
”1-9”, ”A-Z”, hyphen ”-” and full stop ”.”. No lower case characters. 1 40-123.ABC-100-1 50
2 40-456.DEF-100-1 35
3 40-789.GHI-100-1 80
Δ Attention!
4 0
The name of each program must be in the network server directory or
memory card (Memory Card PCMCIA), with the same spelling and also 5 40-ABC.123-100-1 60
in upper case letters, but this time with the extension (.TRF). 6 0
7 40-DEF.456-100-1 100
8 40-GHI.789-100-1 20
The number of characters for the program name is 20 maximum, extension
(.TRF) not included. Select array with ↓↑← →
>_ LOOP 000000 / 000000
The number of digits in the part number is 8.
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:26:21 CHAN1
If the cup collecting device is used, do not exceed 6 program names. (ON) (SOURCE) ( ) ( TEST ) ( LOOP )
Take the cursor to the bottom of the page to enter a value opposite LOOP. This
is the number of loops you wish to run, in this case the number of repetitions A character entered by mistake on the
of the entire page. Maximum number of loops: 999999. If the value is 0, the data entry line can be erased by pres‐
repetition is infinite. sing the <CAN> key.
See chap. 8
The operator can erase an entire field
by pressing the <DELETE>... key In this
case, the field to be deleted needs to be
selected, and then the <DELETE>... key
pressed. The system will request con‐
firmation of deletion.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.2 /36

16.14.3 Selection of the downloading source >>>
Aim: Select the “ETHERNET” or

“MEMORY CARD” source.
Select the MDI mode.
Press the “SOURCE” key to switch

between the “ETHERNET” and
(SOURCE) “MEMORY CARD” downloading source.
A message will request confirmation of
this action.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.3 /37

16.14.4 MultiProgram function test 16.14.5 LOOP function

Aim: Check if the part programs are on the Ethernet network or
memory card (MemoryCard PCMCIA).
The softkey on the far right, ”LOOP” is
designed to start LOOP mode, in this case
a loop mode that allows you to restart the
Before starting the MultiProgram function, list of part programs to run as many times
it is possible to make sure that all the as you wish, either for a specific number of
programs are on the network or memory times, or infinitely. The LOOP mode must
(TEST) card (MEMORY CARD) and that their be activated before you start the MultiPro‐
name is spelled correctly, by pressing the gram mode.
“TEST” softkey.. The cnc EDIT mode must
be selected. The number of LOOPs is entered in a field
at the bottom to the right of the word
LOOP.
The field on the left is for the number of
At this point, the programs will be downloaded one by one, converted, the
LOOPs you wish to run. If the field is set to
offsets will be restored for each program and the tool catalogues will be (LOOP)
zero, the number of LOOPs will be infinite.
checked.
The field on the right cannot be edited, as
it contains the count of the LOOPs run.
Interrupting the MultiProgram mode does
When the message: ”Test successful” is not set the number of LOOPs under way
(TEST) displayed, deactivate the TEST mode by to 0. Only the complete running of the
pressing the ”TEST” softkey again. number of LOOPs set will set it to zero.
This is so you can recall where you are in
the event of an early interruption of the
MultiProgram mode.
Next, press the LOOP softkey and answer

Y to the confirmation request.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.5 /38

16.14.6 Starting the Multi Program function Therefore select the auto cnc MEM mode and press start cycle when the
message prompts you: ”Select auto cnc mode and press start ...”
Goal: Launching the part program running cycle
The operator is responsible for his part programs, their contents and the
operations they carry out. The operator must make sure the machine is
in the condition to run a program.
When all the data have been entered and checked, you may start the Multi‐
Program function.
You need to know that without the operator's intervention, the system will run If the operator wishes to interrupt the
the programs from the top of the list down. cycle, he must do so normally. It is only
when the machine has stopped and is in
(OFF)
RESET that the MultiProgram function can
be deactivated by pressing the OFF soft‐
To start the MultiProgram function, the key
operator should select the cnc EDIT mode
and then press the ON softkey. To view the countdown of the number of
(ON) parts each time the program is run, the
(M20)
operator should select the Program page
and press the M20... softkey
The MultiProgram function searches for the first program to run, displays its
name flashing in reverse video and places an arrow to the left of the next pro‐
gram to run. The operator can exit the MultiProgram page at any time and return to it later.
The arrow is not displayed if the program under way is the last one on the list
to be run.
Note: When all the programs have run, the machine awaits pre-heating and the
the operator can affect the choice of first program downloaded before MultiProgram function displays the following message: ”All programs are
pressing ”ON ” by pressing the ”PROG +” or ”PROG -” softkeys. An executed ...”
arrow will point to the first program to run. The programs upstream of
the one indicated will not be downloaded.
For understandable safety reasons, the Multi Program function requires that
the first program on the list be started by the operator using the START
CYCLE key.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.6 /39

>>>
(PROG +) When a program is in progress, the oper‐
ator can modify the choice of the next pro‐
gram to run by pressing the [PROG +] and
(PROG -) [PROG -] softkeys.
This will move the arrow to the left of the program names.
The operator can chose to move the arrow up or down the list of programs or
even place it opposite the program currently in progress, which will repeat the
running of the program with the related number of parts.
The operator can decide if the program in progress is the last one to run. He
simply has to move the arrow all the way to the top or bottom until it disap‐
pears. At this stage, there will be no further programs to run and the
MultiProgram function will cease to operate at the end of the number of pro‐
gram parts in progress.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 16.14.6 /40

17. CUSTOMER INTERFACE FUNCTIONS

17.1.1Optional Socket Inputs
- No. inputs per socket : 2
Note :
In MDI and automatic mode, with the doors open, the starting or - Application : for sensors, pressostats, pushbuttons, etc.
stopping of outlets with M811/812 - M813/M814 - M821/M822 - which connect to :
M823/M824 is not permitted. Terminal Box XT 800 in the back of the
machine.
17.1 OPTIONAL SOCKETS - Optional Socket Input Wiring :

Optional Socket 1 : Input 1 is Terminal 891
Over Optional Sockets and Part Program, the user may operate functions on Terminal Box XT 800.
other than M‐functions, such as :
Input 2 is Terminal 892
- Valves (e.g. for an actuator) on Terminal Box XT 800.
- Message display Optional Socket 2 : Input 1 is Terminal 893
- Machine stop following an alarm on Terminal Box XT 800.
- Program selection following an event Input 2 is Terminal 894
on Terminal Box XT 800.
- No. Optional Sockets on the machine : 2
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.1 /1

17.1.2Optional Socket Outputs - Optional Socket Output Wiring :

- No. outputs per socket : 2 Optional Socket 1 : Output 1 is Terminal 814
- Application : Activation of relays, contactors,
electrovalves, electro‐magnets, etc. Output 2 is Terminal 824
which connect to : on Terminal Box XT 800.
Terminal Box XT 800 in the back of the Optional Socket 2 : Output 1 is Terminal 834
machine. on Terminal Box XT 800.
Output voltage, max.: 60 V DC Output 2 is Terminal 844
Output current, max.: 1.5 A DC
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.2 /2

Terminal box to locate

& fix when assembling
Machine's Front Plate fig 702
Machine's back Plate fig 701
Terminal Box XT 800 fig 703
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.2 /3

When you configurate the socket to enable the message: 2011: MESSAGE ON
17.1.3Programming Optional Socket 1 OPTIONAL SOCKET, this can entail stopping and restarting the program run
automatically :
Option : K 23.0 = 1
Configurating Optional Socket 1
Now the appearance of 2011 MESSAGE ON OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 stops the
part program, its disappearance restarts the part program.
The first thing to do is to configurate Optional Socket 1 over Part Program and DO 1756=1 : enables display of Alarm 2012:
preferably outside the Main Program loop. ALARM CLASS 1 OPTION SOCKET.
An Alarm Class 1 stops the program at the end of table.
Programming: M800 P1=1756
DO SIGNALS FOR CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 DO 1757=1 : enables display of Alarm 1013:
ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET.
An Alarm Class 3 stops the program by enforcing axes
feedhold, turns off the coolant, the chip conveyor
DO 1750=1 : reverses Input 1 and enables Input 1 signal at 0.
and the spindles.
DO 1751=1 : reverses Input 2 and enables Input 2 signal at 0.
DO 1760=1 : selects a new program (table).
DO 1752=1 : disables Input 1 and Input 1 signal is not used.
DO 1755=1 : enables display of Message 2011:
MESSAGE ON OPTION SOCKET.
A message does not affect the Part Program run.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.3 /4

ENABLE / DISABLE OUTPUTS ON OPTIONAL SOCKET 1

ENABLE INPUT CHECK‐FUNCTION INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP M811 : enables Output 1.
M812 : disables Output 1.
M815 enables check start, DO 1761=1 : disables Output 1 over RESET key.
generates 100 ms impulse to enable check function Programming: M800 P1=1761
of inputs on Socket 1. DO 1765=1 : disables Output 1.
M813 : enables Output 2.
⇒ Info : Alarms Class 1 and 3 change over to Alarms Class 4 after 10 M814 : disables Output 2.
minutes and cut off the power to the machine. DO 1762=1 : disables Output 2 over RESET key.
DO 1766=1 : disables Output 2.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.3 /5

17.1.4Programming Optional Socket 2

When you configurate the socket to enable the message: 2011: MESSAGE ON
OPTIONAL SOCKET, this can entail stopping and restarting the program run
Configurating Optional Socket 2 automatically :
The first thing to do is to configurate Optional Socket 2 over Part Program and
Option : K 23.1 = 1
preferably outside the Main Program loop.
Now the appearance of 2011 MESSAGE ON OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 stops the
part program, its disappearance restarts the part program.
DO 1776=1 : enables display of Alarm 2012:
DO SIGNALS FOR CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 ALARM CLASS 1 OPTION SOCKET.
DO 1770=1 : reverses Input 1 and enables Input 1 signal at 0. An Alarm Class 1 stops the program at the end of table.
Programming: M800 P1=1770 Programming: M800 P1=1776
DO 1771=1 : reverses Input 2 and enables Input 2 signal at 0. DO 1777=1 : enables display of Alarm 1013:
Programming: M800 P1=1771 ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET.
An Alarm Class 3 stops the program by enforcing axes feeds
at 0, turns off the coolant, the chip conveyor and the spindles.
DO 1780=1 : selects a new program (table).
DO 1775=1 : enables display of Message 2011:
MESSAGE ON OPTION SOCKET.
⇒ Note : A message does not affect the Part Program run.

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.4 /6

ENABLE / DISABLE OUTPUTS ON OPTIONAL SOCKET 2

ENABLE INPUT CHECK‐FUNCTION INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
M821 : enables Output 1.
M825 : enables check start, M822 : disables Output 1.
generates 100 ms impulse to enable DO 1781=1 : disables Output 1 over RESET key.
check function of inputs on Socket 2. Programming: M800 P1=1781
⇒ Info : Alarms Class 1 and 3 change over to Alarms Class 4 after 10
minutes and cut off the power to the machine. M823 : enables Output 2.
M824 : disables Output 2.
DO 1782=1 : disables Output 2 over RESET key.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.1.4 /7

Terminal box in
Quantity indicator Operating Time
17.2 EXAMPLES OF APPLICATION electric cabinet
2 Terminal
17.2.1KIENZLE Productivity Monitor Control box
XT 800
ENABLE OUTPUTS
INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
ENABLE OUTPUTS INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP

M813 : enables Operating Time Output.
(to be put at program loop start),
enables Output 2 on Optional Socket 1.
M811 D811=1000: enables Quantity Indicator Output.
(Command response time: 1 sec),
enables Output 1 on Optional Socket 1.
M812 : disables Quantity Indicator Output.
disables Output 1 on Optional Socket 1.
M20 : End‐of‐part signal.
M814 : disables Operating Time.
(to be put at program loop end),
disables Output 2 on Optional Socket 1.
Terminal box
in control panel
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR OPTIONAL SOCKET 1
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.1 /8

CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP

17.2.2Sensor Control Operation M800 P1=1773 P2=1776 : 1773 = Disables unused Input 2.
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 1776 = Selects Alarm Class 1.
ENABLE CHECK BY INPUT 1 INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP

M825 Enables check start, generates 100 ms impulse to enable checking
Terminal Input 1 on Optional Socket 2.
box XT 800
If Input 1 on Socket 2 is at 1 and M825 enabled, then Alarm 2012: ALARM

CLASS 1 OPTIONAL SOCKET is displayed and the program stops at the end
of table.
When Input 1 of the optional socket goes over to 1 (24V), the program stops
at the end of table (Alarm Class 1)
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.2 /9

17.2.3Drill Sensor Control

- Drill sensor activated by pneumatic piston. In tool presence : the program stops instantaneously
(Alarm Class 3).
- Sensor signal is wired to Input 1 on Optional Socket 1.
M800 P1=1753 P2=1757 : 1753 disables unused Input 2.
- Pneumatic valve is wired to Output 1 on Optional Socket 1.
1757 selects Alarm Class 3.
ENABLE CHECK INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 M815 enables check start.
M811 D811= 300 Sensing command response time: 300 ms
M812 disables sensing command.
Terminal
box
XT 800 In tool absence (input is 0 and M815 enabled) :
Alarm 2012: ALARM CLASS 1 OPTION SOCKET
is displayed and the program stops at the end of table.
In tool presence (input is 1 and M815 enabled) :
Alarm 1013: ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET
is displayed and the program stops at the end of table.
TIMING DIAGRAM FOR DRILL SENSOR CHECK

300 ms
Output 1 Optional
Socket 1 100 ms
CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP M815

In tool absence : the program stops at the end of table Sensor motion
(Alarm Class 1). Time [ITP]
M815
M800 P1=1750 P2=1753 P3=1756 1750 = Reverses Input 1
M811
1753 = Disables unused Input 2.
M812
1756 = Selects Alarm Class 1.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.3 /10

17.2.4Oil Level Check
When level signal arrives at 0, a message is displayed on the NC screen. CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 2
OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
M800 P1=1770 P2=1773 P3=1775 :

Input 1
Optional socket 2 = 1 [24V] 1770 reverses Input 1 signal (enabled at 0).
1773 disables unused Input 2.
Input 1
Optional socket 2 = 0 [0V] 1775 selects a message.
ENABLE CHECK BY INPUT 1

INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 M825 : enables check start,

generates 100 ms impulse to enable checking Inputs 1 and 2
on Socket 2.
If Input 1 on Socket 2 is 0 and M825 enabled, Alarm 2011: MESSAGE ON
OPTION SOCKET is displayed.
2 Terminal 893 The operator must assume that the oil tank is empty.
box XT 800
24V
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.4 /11

17.2.5Single‐Acting Piston Control Monitored by Two Sensors
Assumptions : The following requirements to be met :

- Piston with advance control. - Piston‐forward sensing to be 1 before piston return.
Otherwise, the program stops instantaneously by selecting
- Sensor for piston in forward position.
an Alarm Class 3.
- Sensor for piston in backward position.
- Piston‐backward sensing to be 1 before machining is continued.
an Alarm Class 3.
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR
PISTON‐FORWARD SENSOR, PISTON‐BACKWARD SENSOR,

INPUT I on OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 INPUT I on OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 PISTON‐ADVANCE ELECTRO‐VALVE
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.5 /12

CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 If Input 1 on Socket 1 is 0 and M815 enabled,

OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP Alarm 1013: ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET is displayed
and the operator must assume that the piston advance has not been properly
M800 P1=1750 P2=1753 P3=1757 :
completed.
1750 reverses input signal (enabled at 0).
If Input 1 on Socket 2 is 0 and M825 enabled,
1757 selects an Alarm Class 3. Alarm 1013: ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET is displayed
and the operator must assume that the piston return has not been properly
completed.
CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 2
OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
M800 P1=1770 P2=1773 P3=1777 : PISTON CHECK TIMING DIAGRAM

1773 disables unused Input 2. Piston advance control
1777 selects an Alarm Class 3. Piston forward check
Piston motion
ENABLE SENSOR CHECK
INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
Piston backward check
M815 : enables check start by piston‐forward input.
M811 D811=1000 : enables piston advance control.
M812 : disables piston advance control (piston return).
Time [ITP]
G04 X2 : 2 s dwell
(acc. to the time necessary for piston to return)
M825 : enables check start by piston‐backward input.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.5 /13

17.2.6Double‐Acting Piston Control Monitored by Two Sensors
Assumptions : The following requirements to be met :

- Piston with advance / return control. - Piston‐forward sensing to be 1 before piston return.
Otherwise, the program stops instantaneously by selecting an Alarm Class
- Sensor for piston in forward position.
3.
- Sensor for piston in backward position.
- Piston‐backward sensing to be 1 before machining is continued.
an Alarm Class 3.
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR
PISTON‐FORWARD SENSOR, PISTON‐BACKWARD SENSOR, PISTON‐ADVANCE PISTON‐RETURN

INPUT I on OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 INPUT I on OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 ELECTRO‐VALVE ELECTRO‐VALVE
Terminal Terminal Terminal

box XT 800 box XT 800 box XT 800
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.6 /14

CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 1 OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP If Input 1 on Socket 1 is 0 and M815 enabled,
Alarm 1013: ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET is displayed
M800 P1=1750 P2=1753 P3=1757 :
and the operator must assume that the piston advance has not been properly
1750 reverses input signal (enabled at 0). completed.
1753 disables unused Input 2. If Input 1 on Socket 2 is 0 and M825 enabled,
1757 selects an Alarm Class 3. Alarm 1013: ALARM CLASS 3 OPTION SOCKET is displayed
and the operator must assume that the piston return has not been properly
completed.
CONFIGURATING OPTIONAL SOCKET 2 OUTSIDE PROGRAM LOOP
M800 P1=1770 P2=1773 P3=1777 :
1777 selects an Alarm Class 3.
ENABLE SENSOR CHECK INSIDE PROGRAM LOOP

M811 D811=16 : enables piston advance control.
M812 : disables piston advance control.
G04 X2 : 2 s dwell
(acc. to the time necessary for piston to reach
the piston‐forward sensor)
M815 : enables check start by piston‐forward input.
M813 D813=16 : enables piston return control.
M814 disables piston return control.
G04 X2 : 2 s dwell
(acc. to the time necessary for piston to reach
the piston‐backward sensor)
M825 : enables check start by piston‐backward input.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.6 /15

PISTON CHECK TIMING DIAGRAM

Piston advance control
2s
Piston forward check

2s

Time [ITP]
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.2.6 /16

17.3 OPTIONAL SOCKET DIAGRAM

Flag 6
Flag 7
Flag 3 Flag 5
6 Class 0
Flag 1 Flags 1 and 2 : reverse Inputs In1 and In2.
3 Flags 3 and 4 : disable Inputs In1 and/or In2.
1 Flag indication 1 disables the input.
In1 5 Class 1 Flag 5 : determines when check starts (ck).
7
Flag 2 Flags 6 to 8 : determine actions to be enabled.
Gates 6, 7, 8, 9 are actually flip‐flops to be
2 4 8 Class 3 reinitialized by PMC when program starts.
In2
Flag 9 : enables Register Event 7. (cf. the concept of sequences)
Flag 4 Flag 8
Out 1
Flag 9 9 Event 7
Out 2
24 V= (2x)
0V (2x)
Gnd
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.3 /17

17.3.3Enable / Disable Flags for Optional Socket Outputs

17.3.1Recap of Logical Functions
Flags Socket 1 Socket 2
XOR (Gates 1 and 2) OR (Gates 3 and 4) AND (Gates 5 to 9)
1763 1783
A B OUT A B OUT A B OUT Set OUT 1
-1765 -1785
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1764 1784
0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 Set OUT 2
-1766 -1786
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
1765 1785
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reset OUT 1
-1763 -1783
1766 1786
Reset OUT 2
-1764 -1784
17.3.2Optional Socket Configuration Flags
RR1 1761 1781
Flags Socket No. 1 Socket No. 2
RR2 1762 1782
1 1750 1770
RR1 and RR2 enable resets of Output 1 and 2 respectively for machine
2 1751 1771 program reset.
3 1752 1772
4 1753 1773
5 1754 1774
6 1755 1775
7 1756 1776
8 1757 1777
9 1760 1780
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 17.3.3 /18

18. MAINTENANCE PAGES 18.1 MAINTENANCE EVERY 500, 1500 AND 2500 HOURS'
OPERATION
Maintenance Pages display listed maintenance works scheduled for good Every 500, 1500 and 2500 hours' operation the following texts are displayed:
operation of the machine.
1-2
TO AVOID ANY MALFUNCTION OF THE MACHINE,
FOLLOW STRICTLY DIRECTIONS GIVEN
- Use the PAGE UP / DOWN keys / to turn the maintenance IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
pages.
IN THE NEXT PAGES, YOU WILL FIND LISTED
- Quit the maintenance pages when you no longer need them. THE MAINTENANCE WORKS TO PERFORM.
Otherwise, the other menus will be inaccessible.
For this, go to the last page and press the [QUIT] softkey.
Note :
The machine operating hours' counter is not active unless the coolant - Press the PAGE DOWN key :
is switched on, i.e. the machine produces.
2-2
- CLEAN OR CHANGE THE AIR FILTERS OF THE CONTROL
CABINET.
Δ Attention !
Follow strictly directions given in Operating Instructions 300481:
INSTALLATION - OPERATION - MAINTENANCE.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 18.1 /1

18.2 MAINTENANCE EVERY 1000 AND 2000 HOURS' OPERATION
Every 1000 and 2000 hours' operation the following texts are displayed : - Press the PAGE DOWN key :
1-2 3-3
TO AVOID ANY MALFUNCTION OF THE MACHINE, - CHECK CONDITION AND TENSION OF TIMING BELTS.
FOLLOW STRICTLY DIRECTIONS GIVEN - CLEAN LUBRICANT FLOWRATE SENSOR.
IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
- GREASE GUIDES AND BALLSCREWS.
THE MAINTENANCE WORKS TO PERFORM.
- Press the PAGE DOWN key :
2-3
- CLEAN OR CHANGE AIR FILTERS OF THE CONTROL CABINET.
- CHANGE CUTTING OIL.
- CLEAN SUCTION FILTER.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 18.2 /2

18.3 MAINTENANCE EVERY 3000 HOURS' OPERATION
Every 3000 hours' operation the following texts are displayed :

- Press the PAGE DOWN key :
1-2 3-3
TO AVOID ANY MALFUNCTION OF THE MACHINE, - CHECK CONDITION AND TENSION OF TIMING BELTS.
FOLLOW STRICTLY DIRECTIONS GIVEN - CLEAN LUBRICANT FLOWRATE SENSOR.
IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
- GREASE GUIDES AND BALLSCREWS.
THE MAINTENANCE WORKS TO PERFORM.
- Press the PAGE DOWN key : - Press the PAGE DOWN key :
2-3 4-4
- CLEAN OR CHANGE AIR FILTERS OF THE CONTROL CABINET. - CLEAN THE ENTIRE MACHINE.
- CHANGE CUTTING OIL. - CHANGE MICRO‐RELAYS.
- CLEAN SUCTION FILTER. - GREASE BEVEL GEARS.
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 18.3 /3

>>>
300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 18.3 /4

Vezérlőmüködtetése ANGOL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vezérlőmüködtetése ANGOL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

USER INTERFACE

2. PRECAUTIONARY NOTES BEFORE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

4. KINEMATICS – TOOL POSITIONS -

5. BASIC SEQUENCE FOR STARTING / TURNING OFF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . 1

9. MANUAL OPERATION OF MACHINE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

10. CHANGE GUIDEBUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

11. SPINDLES ROTATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

12. AUXILIARY M AND G - FUNCTIONS

13. AUTO (MATIC) MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

14. SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

15. CUSTOMER PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

16.12.2 To display the abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

17. CUSTOMER INTERFACE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

18. MAINTENANCE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1. GENERALITIES 1.2 ADDRESSES

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 1.2 /1

1.3 DIFFERENTIATION OF DEGREES OF RISK 1.4 IMPORTANT SAFETY INDICATIONS

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 1.4 /2

2. PRECAUTIONARY NOTES BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 SAFETY WITH DOORS OPEN

Operation with doors open

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 2.1 /1

Screen and softkeys icon

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 2.3 /2

3.1 LOCATION OF INTERFACES ON MACHINES

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.1.1 /1

3.1.2 DECO 13a 226-0010 3.1.3 DECO 13bi

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.1.3 /2

3.1.4 DECO 20a & 26a

6 Service Socket 230V 50Hz XS1

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.1.4 /3

3.2 NC KEYBOARD (PROGRAMMING)FANUC 16i TA & TB

For DECO 13/13a-226-0001

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.2 /4

Display all axis positions (in Channel 1 only!). for

ALTER Replace a chain of characters with another one.

Page UP. Application according to operating mode.

Page UP. Application according to operating mode.

MESSAGE Display messages or alarms. Move cursor on the screen.

CUSTOM Display all axis positions (in Channel 1 only!). for

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.2 /5

3.3 CONTROL PANEL (PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTORS)

3.3.1 Control panel 7a/10a &7e/10e, 13a 226-0010, 20a/26a

2.4.5 2.4.7 Other functions

2.4.7 Other functions

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.3.1 /6

2.4.1 Emergency stop button

2.4.3 Power control

2.4.5 Mode selector

2.4.6 Axis and channel selector

2.4.7 Other functions

Commande DECO 13a 226-0001 & 20/26

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.3.3 /7

3.3.4 Main switch QS0

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.3.4 /8

3.4 MAIN BUTTONS

Emergency stop button

NC is ON and the machine members can be controlled.

NC is OFF and all machine members are dead.

300493 en - 01/08 Chap. 3.4 /9

3.4.1 Emergency stop

Location Key Description

Axes lock immediately.

To restart after the use of the emergency stop proceed as follows :